JP6773962B2 - Slot machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a slot machine provided with a predetermined display means capable of displaying game history information.

Conventionally, it has been known to execute an instruction function operating game (AT) for activating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (for example, the correct answer pressing order when a pressing order bell is won) (for example). See Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-161344

An object to be solved by the present invention is to make it possible to clearly distinguish between information on the type of game history and numerical information on game history as game history information .

The present invention solves the above-mentioned problems by the following means (in parentheses, the configuration of the corresponding embodiment is shown).
The invention of claim 1 is
Predetermined control means (main control board 50) and
It is equipped with a predetermined display means (management information display LED74) capable of displaying game history information.
The predetermined control means aggregates a plurality of information related to the game (value corresponding to the number of games in the advantageous section, the total number of games played, the total number of payouts, the value corresponding to the number of payouts when the continuous bonus is operated, the value corresponding to the number of payouts when the bonus is activated, etc.) Enable and
The predetermined control means uses the aggregated information to provide numerical information regarding the game history (advantageous section ratio, continuous bonus ratio (6000 games), bonus ratio (6000 games), continuous bonus ratio (cumulative), bonuses. Ratio (cumulative)) can be calculated
The game history information is composed of information related to the type of game history (information type) and numerical information related to the game history.
As the game history information, there are a case where the character ratio information is displayed and a case where the continuous character ratio information is displayed.
Figures for a game history corresponding to the character object ratio information information is character object ratio (ratio of the number of payouts of game media during character object operation to the total payout of game media),
The numerical information regarding the game history corresponding to the continuous bonus ratio information is the continuous bonus ratio (the ratio of the number of game media paid out when the first-class special bonus is activated to the total number of game media paid out).
Information on the type of game history can be displayed by the first display unit (digit 6) and the second display unit (digit 7) of the predetermined display means.
Numerical information related to the game history can be displayed by the third display unit (digit 8) and the fourth display unit (digit 9) of the predetermined display means.
When the game history information is displayed on the predetermined display means, the DP segment of the second display unit is configured to be lit.
When displaying the character ratio information, if the cumulative number of games is less than a predetermined value (for example, "175000" games), information on the type of game history corresponding to the character ratio information (character ratio (cumulative)). "A7"), which corresponds to the information type of, can be displayed in a blinking manner.
When displaying the continuous bonus ratio information, if the cumulative number of games is less than the predetermined value, the information regarding the type of game history corresponding to the continuous bonus ratio information (in the information type of the continuous bonus ratio (cumulative)). The corresponding "A6") is configured to blink and display .
It is characterized in that when the total number of payouts of the game media reaches a predetermined upper limit, the update of the total number of payouts of the game media is completed .

According to the invention of claim 1, when the game history information is displayed on the predetermined display means, the DP segment of the second display unit can be turned on, so that the first display unit and the second display of the predetermined display means can be turned on. It is possible to clearly distinguish between the information regarding the type of the game history displayed on the unit and the numerical information regarding the game history displayed on the third display unit and the fourth display unit of the predetermined display means .

It is a block diagram which shows the outline of the control of the slot machine in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the storage number display LED, the advantageous section display LED, the acquisition number display LED, the settlement switch and the like. It is a figure which shows the main control board housed in a board case, (a) shows Example 1, and (b) shows Example 2. It is a figure explaining the detail of a digit and a segment. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement of a reel. It is a figure which shows the display window (transparent window) provided in the slot machine, the positional relationship of each reel, the effective line and the like. It is a figure (1) which shows the type of a combination, the number of payouts, and the combination of symbols. It is a figure (2) which shows the type of a combination, the number of payouts, and the combination of symbols. It is a figure (3) which shows the type of a combination, the number of payouts, and the combination of symbols. It is a figure (4) which shows the type of a combination, the number of payouts, and the combination of symbols. It is a figure (5) which shows the type of a combination, the number of payouts, and the combination of symbols. It is a figure (6) which shows the type of a combination, the number of payouts, and the combination of symbols. It is a figure (1) which shows the relationship between the condition device, the winning combination, and the push order. It is a figure (2) which shows the relationship between the condition device, the winning combination, and the push order. It is a figure (3) which shows the relationship between the condition device, the winning combination, and the push order. It is a figure (4) which shows the relationship between the condition device, the winning combination, and the push order. It is a figure (1) which shows the figurative table. It is a figure (2) which shows the figurative table. It is a figure which shows the push order instruction number table. It is a figure which shows the relationship of push order instruction number, advantageous push order, and display contents. It is a figure which shows the production group number table. It is a figure explaining the transition of RT. It is a figure which shows the lighting process of the advantageous section display LED. It is a timing chart (Example 1 and Example 2) which shows the processing flow of a main control board, acquisition number display LED, and an image display device. It is a timing chart (Example 3 and Example 4) which shows the processing flow of a main control board, acquisition number display LED, and an image display device. It is a figure which shows the flow of the display of the push order instruction information by the acquisition number display LED, and the notification of the correct answer push order by an image display device. It is a part of RWM, and is the figure which shows the storage area about the advantageous section and the total number of games. It is a part of RWM and is a figure which shows the storage area about the total number of payouts. It is a part of RWM, and is a figure which shows the storage area about the number of payouts at the time of continuous accessory operation. It is a part of RWM, and is a figure which shows the storage area about the number of payouts at the time of operation of an accessory. It is a part of RWM, and is the figure (modification example) which shows the storage area about the number of payouts at the time of continuous accessory operation. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process of updating the number of games, etc. using a register. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example 1 in steps S109 to S114 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example 2 in steps S109 to S114 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example 3 in steps S109 to S114 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process of updating the number of games, etc. without using a register. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of calculation process of the advantageous section ratio. It is a figure explaining the information to be displayed on the management information display LED. It is a figure which shows the example which displays the management information on the storage number display LED. It is a figure which shows the example which displays the management information on the acquisition number display LED. It is an external perspective view which shows the base part 1 of a slot machine 10. In the second embodiment, it is a figure which shows the main control board housed in the board case, (a) shows Example 1, and (b) shows Example 2.

In the present specification, the meanings of the terms are as follows.
"RT" means that the type (number) of the condition devices (1BB, replay, small winning combination) to be drawn and the winning probability thereof are in a unique lottery state, and "RT transition" is one. By shifting from RT to another RT, it means that the winning probability of at least one conditional device (for example, replay) to be a lottery target fluctuates. Therefore, the winning probability for each type of replay in one RT is a value peculiar to that RT, and the winning probability for each type of replay is the same for one RT and the other RT. Absent. However, it is permissible that the total value of the winning probabilities of the replay is the same for one RT and the other RT.

The RT includes non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, and RT4 in this embodiment (FIG. 22 described later).
Note that "non-RT" does not mean that it is not included in the concept of RT, but is equivalent to "RT0". Therefore, the term "RT" as used herein includes non-RT.
In the present embodiment, the non-internal inside is non-RT, RT1, RT2, or RT3, and the internal inside is RT4. The type (number) of replays to be drawn and the winning probability are different between non-internal and internal.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, 1BBA operation and 1BBB operation are provided as RTs during the special game. In this embodiment, at least one replay lottery is performed for both the 1BBA operation and the 1BBB operation.
The “combination” refers to a lottery target, and in the present embodiment, a condition device is drawn, and the condition device is set to include at least one combination. Therefore, when any of the conditional devices is won, at least one winning combination is won (having at least one winning combination).

The condition device to be drawn includes a "feature condition device" including any of "special roles (features)" and a "winning and replay condition device" including either a small role or a replay. ..
The "feature condition device" includes any of the special roles. When a special role wins, SB (single bonus), RB (type 1 special character; regular bonus), CB (type 2 special character; challenge bonus), which are devices that make it easy to win a small role, 1BB (Type 1 accessory continuous operation device; Type 1 big bonus) and 2BB (Type 2 accessory continuous operation device; Type 2 big bonus) are activated.

Here, the first-class accessory continuous operation device (1BB) means a device capable of continuously operating the first-class special accessory (RB).
Similarly, the type 2 accessory continuous operation device (2BB) means a device capable of continuously operating the type 2 special accessory (CB).
In the present embodiment, only 1BB is provided as a special role, and has two types (1BBA and 1BBB) described later.
During the operation of 1BB, the RB ends when either the winning of two wins or the two games is satisfied, and after the end, the RB is operated again on condition that the end condition of the 1BB operation is not satisfied. ..
Further, in this embodiment, SB, CB, and 2BB are not provided.

On the other hand, the "winning and replay condition device" includes either a small winning combination or a replay in which the winning information is not carried over to the next game or later.
In the present embodiment, the winning and replay condition device numbers "0" to "30" are provided.
On the other hand, the "role condition device" includes either RB, 1BB and 2BB in which the winning information can be carried over to the next game, and SB and CB in which the winning information is not carried over to the next game. In this embodiment, only 1BB (1BBA and 1BBB) that can carry over the winning information to the next game or later are provided.

When the winning information is won in the character condition device that includes any of the special roles that can be carried over to the next game or later, the winning information of the special role is until the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role stops at the valid line. Will be carried over to the next game.
A game in which the winning information is not won in the character condition device including any of the special roles that can be carried over to the next game or later is referred to as "non-internal". On the other hand, when the winning character condition device is won, but the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning special role is not yet stopped at the effective line, that is, the game in which the winning information of the special role is carried over is "inside". That is. In the present embodiment, the game that has won the bonus condition device is included in "non-internal", but the game that has won the bonus condition device may be included in "internal".

The "advantageous operation mode" of the stop switch is an operation mode in which a winning combination with a large number of payouts wins in a game in which the game result (combination of symbols that stop at the effective line) is advantageous / disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch. Alternatively, it refers to an operation mode in which a winning combination that does not shift (promote) to an advantageous RT or shift (fall) to a disadvantageous RT wins a prize. The "advantageous operation mode" is also referred to as a correct operation mode.

The "operation mode" is a concept that refers to the pressing order of the stop switch and / or the operation timing (the timing of pressing the stop switch for the target symbol to stop at the effective line).
Then, in the present embodiment, the "game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch" is a game at the time of winning the push order bell (small winning combination B group, small winning combination C group), and duplicate replays (replay B group, replay C group). ) Corresponds to the game at the time of winning.

Furthermore, when the push order bell is won, the number of bells (small winning combination) that wins when the stop switch is operated in the correct pressing order is the higher bell (out of the duplicate winning bell group (small winning combination), the number of payouts is It may be called a bell (small role), which is most advantageous for the player to display the combination of the symbols such as the most small role.
On the other hand, when the stop switch is operated in the wrong pressing order when the push order bell is won, there are cases where the cheap bell wins a prize and cases where the role is missed, depending on the operation timing of the stop switch. The stop rolls (combination of symbols on the effective line, also referred to as "spilled stitches") displayed when the winning combination is missed are referred to as "pattern symbols" in the present embodiment, and have pattern symbols 01 to 03.

On the other hand, at the time of replay duplicate winning (winning of replay B group and replay C group), a combination of different symbols is stopped and displayed according to the order in which the stop switch is pressed, but no omission occurs when the replay is won (“PB = 1” described later). ").
In this case, the push order for stopping and displaying the combination of symbols that is advantageous to the player, for example, the combination of symbols that shift to the RT with a higher replay winning probability, or the combination of symbols that maintain the RT with a high replay winning probability is "correct answer". It is called "push order" or "promotion push order".
On the other hand, the push order in which the combination of symbols that shift from the RT that is advantageous to the player (for example, the RT with a high probability of winning a replay) to the RT that is unfavorable (for example, the RT with a low probability of winning a replay) is stopped and displayed is "incorrect". It is called "push order" or "fall (demotion) push order".

The "instruction function" means a function of displaying (notifying) the above-mentioned "advantageous operation mode" to the player.
In other words, the "instruction function" refers to a device that facilitates winning. On the other hand, when the "instruction function" is a device that facilitates the winning of small wins, the "instruction function" displays the correct answer pressing order for winning the correct answer pressing order (higher bell) when the pressing order bell is won. This does not include displaying the correct push order for winning a favorable replay (a replay for shifting to a favorable RT or a replay for maintaining a favorable RT) when a duplicate replay is won.

In the following embodiments, the "instruction function" refers to a function of displaying the "advantageous operation mode" to the player, and the "operation of the instruction function" indicates the correct answer pressing order when the pressing order bell is won. , And to display the correct answer push order to win an advantageous replay at the time of duplicate replay winning.
It should be noted that showing the content of the "instruction" to the player is "display", and notifying the player of the content of the instruction is "notification". Therefore, the "instruction function" is both a "display function" and a "notification function".
Further, the "instruction" is a concept having the meaning of "instruction", but the player is not penalized for not following the "instruction". However, if the correct answer push order displayed by the operation of the instruction function is not followed, the higher bell may not win when the push order bell is won, or the unfavorable replay may win when the replay duplicate win is won.

Further, the "instruction function operating game" is a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (condition device having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (small combination B group, small combination C group, replay B group, replay C). In the game) won in the group), it means a game in which the instruction function is activated. Therefore, the instruction function operating game is one game. The instruction function operating game may also be referred to as a notification game.
Further, even if the game has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, when the instruction function is not activated, the game is not an instruction function operation game.

In the present embodiment, the "game section" includes a "normal section", a "standby section", and an "advantageous section".
First, the "normal section" refers to a signal related to the instruction function, specifically, a push order instruction number and a winning and replay condition device number (information capable of determining the correct push order) described later, which are peripheral boards (for example, sub-control). It is a game section that is prohibited from being transmitted to the board) and does not affect the performance related to the instruction function at all (the instruction function is not activated). However, in addition to the lottery of the conditional device (combination), it is possible to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous section (lottery, etc.).
Since the instruction function must not be activated in the normal section, it is not possible to display the push order instruction information on a predetermined display device (LED, etc.) electrically connected to the main control board, and the instruction function can be used. Since such a signal is not transmitted to the peripheral board, it is not possible to display (notify) an advantageous operation mode by an image display device electrically connected to the sub control board described later.

When making a transition decision to an advantageous section in a normal section, it is necessary to make a transition decision in association with (associating) with the winning condition device.
Here, making a decision to shift to an advantageous section in association with the winning conditional device means determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous section at the same time as the lottery of the conditional device, and winning a specific conditional device. There is a case where a lottery is separately performed to determine whether or not to shift to an advantageous section on the condition of.

In the present embodiment, it is set to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous section at the same time as the lottery of the conditional device. In addition, the length (number of games) of the advantageous section to be determined (winning) differs depending on the winning condition device. For example, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section when 1BB, which will be described later, is won, the initial value is counted from the end of the 1BB game to become the advantageous section of 50 games, and when the small winning combination E1 is won alone. When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, it may be an advantageous section in which only one instruction function operation game (excluding the game in which the small role C group, the replay B group, and the replay C group are won) is executed. is there.

Furthermore, when deciding to shift to the advantageous section in association with the winning condition device, the condition device that can decide to shift to the advantageous section (when separately drawing a lottery as to whether or not to shift to the advantageous section) , The condition device that is a condition for performing the lottery) is set so that it is a condition device that does not have a setting difference in the winning probability.
Here, the "set value" determines the player's advantage, and the higher (or lower) the set value is, the more advantageous the player is (the expected value of the ball output is higher). ) It is set. The set value is provided in six stages, for example, setting 1 to setting 6.
The "conditional device having no setting difference in the winning probability (common to the setting)" refers to a conditional device having the same winning probability in all the settings.

In addition, it is only "possible" to determine the transition to the advantageous section in association with the winning of the conditional device having no setting difference in the winning probability, and when the conditional device having no setting difference in the winning probability is won. However, it does not mean that you must always shift to an advantageous section or always draw a lottery to shift to an advantageous section. Of course, it is possible not to make any decision regarding the advantageous section even at the time of winning the conditional device having no setting difference in the winning probability.

On the other hand, "conditional device having a setting difference in winning probability (for each setting)" means that the winning probability is not the same for all settings. For example, when the winning probabilities of all the set values are different, or when the winning probabilities of some set values are different from the winning probabilities of some other set values (for example, the winning probabilities of settings 1 to 5). Is "x" and the winning probability of setting 6 is "y (≠ x)").

Further, the "advantageous section" is a game section having performance related to the instruction function (the instruction function may be activated), and specifically, when the instruction function is activated, the instruction content on the main control board. It refers to a game section in which a signal related to the instruction function can be transmitted to the sub-control board only when the push order instruction information is displayed so that (advantageous operation mode) can be identified. The game in the advantageous section may also be referred to as a noticeable game. On the contrary, the game in the normal section and the game in the waiting section may be referred to as a non-notifying game.
However, the sub control board cannot output an effect contrary to the instruction content given by the main control board or the signal related to the received instruction function.

Then, in the advantageous section of the present embodiment, the maximum payout number (“9”) corresponding to the specified number (“3”) in the game (when the accessory is not activated) in which the instruction function operation game can be executed can be obtained. In a game in which a conditional device (small winning combination B group) having an advantageous operating mode is won, at least one game or more is performed to instruct the operating mode of the stop switch in which the winning combination (small winning combination 01) related to the maximum payout number is awarded. It is necessary.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, the small winning combination B group and the small winning combination C group are provided as so-called push order bell condition devices.
In the small winning combination B group, the small winning combination 01, which is a 9-card winning combination, always wins when the pushing order is correct, and the 1-card winning combination can be won when the pushing order is incorrect (may be missed).
On the other hand, in the small winning combination C group, the small winning combination 02, which is a three-card combination, always wins when the push order is correct, and the one-card combination always wins when the pushing order is incorrect.

The game when the instruction function activated game is executed is when the accessory is not activated (normal game), and the specified number (the number of medals to be inserted) in this normal game is "3".
Further, when the specified number is "3", the maximum number of payouts is "9" (at the time of winning the small winning combination 01).
Therefore, in the advantageous section of the present embodiment, the correct answer pressing order for winning the small winning combination 01 is determined by activating the instruction function at the time of winning the condition device (small winning combination B group) in which the small winning combination 01 can be won. It is necessary to execute at least one game to be displayed.

Further, during the advantageous section, in the game in which the condition device having the advantageous operation mode is won, the instruction function may be always activated to display the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
On the other hand, even if the game is won by the condition device having an advantageous operation mode during the advantageous section, the instruction function may not be activated.

Furthermore, the "standby section" refers to a game section when the player has decided to shift to the advantageous section and has not yet shifted to the advantageous section. The waiting section may or may not be provided. That is, the normal section may be shifted to the advantageous section, the normal section may be shifted to the standby section, and the standby section may be further shifted to the advantageous section. It should be noted that it is not possible to shift from the advantageous section to the standby section, and after the end of the advantageous section, it always shifts to the normal section. The waiting section can be shifted only when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the conditional device including the special combination that can be carried over to the next game or later, and corresponds to the special combination. A game in which a combination of symbols is displayed must be completed. Of course, it may end before the game in which the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination is displayed.
Further, in the standby section, the instruction function cannot be activated on the main control board, and the signal related to the instruction function cannot be transmitted to the sub control board. When the instruction function is operated on the main control board and the signal related to the instruction function is transmitted to the sub control board, it is a condition that the section is advantageous.

In the advantageous section of the present embodiment, there are cases where one instruction function operation game (excluding games won in the small winning combination C group, replay B group, and replay C group) is executed, and cases where a predetermined number of games are executed. Have.
In the advantageous section in which the game is executed a predetermined number of times, when the condition device having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is won, the instruction function is basically activated.
The end condition of the advantageous section is not to determine the number of games described above, but for example, to perform an end (puncture) lottery at a predetermined timing, and to end the advantageous section when the lottery is won. You may.

Alternatively, the execution condition of the instruction function operating game is not satisfied only by shifting to the advantageous section, and whether or not to execute the instruction function operating game is determined by lottery or the like on the condition that the instruction function operating game is in the advantageous section. When it is decided to execute the instruction function operation game, the instruction function operation game may be executed until a predetermined end condition is satisfied.
In addition, during the advantageous section, it is determined (lottery, etc.) whether or not to add (add) the number of (remaining) games in the advantageous section.
In addition, the maximum number of games is set for the advantageous section, and when the maximum number of games is reached, the advantageous section is always terminated at that point even if the number of remaining games in the advantageous section is reached (limiter). Operation), shift to the normal section.

Further, when the maximum number of games is reached, even if the condition device (small winning combination B group) having an advantageous operation mode capable of obtaining the maximum number of payouts (“9”) has never been won, or the winning is won. However, even if the winning combination (small combination 01) related to the maximum number of payouts has never instructed the operation mode of the stop switch, the advantageous section is always ended at that point (limiter operation), and it is normal. Move to the section.

As mentioned above, the content partially overlaps with the above, but the advantageous section in this embodiment shall be defined as follows.
a) In the normal section, the lottery for whether or not to shift to the advantageous section (even if it is decided at the same time as the lottery for the conditional device) must be linked to the conditional device with no setting difference. That is, the transition probability to the advantageous section must not be different depending on the set value.
b) The additional lottery for the advantageous section (even if it is decided without the lottery) must not refer to the set value. When adding an advantageous section based on the winning condition device, it must be linked to the condition device with no setting difference.

c) Special role in the normal section (meaning the special role that carries over the winning. The same shall apply hereinafter in this paragraph). During the internal or special role operation, the transition lottery for the advantageous section (may be decided at the same time as the lottery for the conditional device). ) Must not be done. In addition, during the special role, even during the advantageous section, an additional lottery for the advantageous section (may be decided without drawing) must not be performed. Furthermore, when a condition device having a setting difference including a special combination is won in an advantageous section and the special combination is in operation, an additional lottery for the advantageous section (determined without drawing) is performed during the special combination operation. Also) must not be done.
Here, in the past, it was common to hold an AT lottery even after being inside, so even if it is inside, wait for the AT winning while maintaining the inside without winning a special role. It was possible. However, recently, it is desirable not to draw AT lottery inside. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a special combination is won in the normal section and the inside is inside, it is determined that the normal section should not be changed to the advantageous section in the inside. Furthermore, if a special role is won in the advantageous section and it becomes inside, it is stipulated that the advantageous section must not be added in the inside.

d) When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, in principle, the transition from the next game to the advantageous section is made, and until the advantageous section starts (in the present embodiment, the bet of the next game becomes possible). ), It is necessary to indicate to the player that it is an advantageous section from the next game (lighting of a lamp indicating that it is an advantageous section, etc.).
Here, conventionally, when an AT is won, it is common to digest a certain number of games (via a precursor) from the time when the AT is won until the player is notified of the AT winning. It was. In addition, for example, in the case of drawing an AT based on the winning of a rare role, if the rare role is missed in the game, the player has won the rare role and the AT is drawn based on the rare role. Because I don't know, even if I won the AT by winning the rare role, I sometimes stopped the game before the AT winning was notified. After that, when another person plays a game on the platform, there is a problem that the other person may enjoy the benefit of the AT (assigned by the previous player). However, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, as a general rule, it is displayed that the advantageous section is from the next game until the advantageous section starts (in the present embodiment, until the bet of the next game becomes possible). Therefore, the above-mentioned problem does not occur.
As described above, in the past, the AT winning is notified after the AT is won (particularly after the AT precursor is passed), whereas in the present embodiment, in principle, until the next game bet becomes possible. , The difference is that it is displayed that it is an advantageous section before the advantageous section is started.
Further, although the conventional notification of AT winning is only performed as a part of the production, it is displayed to the player that it is an advantageous section from the next game in the present embodiment (a lamp indicating that it is an advantageous section). The lighting, etc.) is different in that it is performed to solve the above problem.

Further, the advantageous section ratio refers to the ratio of staying in the advantageous section with respect to the entire gaming section (normal section + waiting section + advantageous section). Specifically, for example, when the number of games played in all the game sections is "1000" and the number of games played in the advantageous section during that period is "700", the ratio of advantageous sections is "70%".
As will be described later, in the present embodiment, the advantageous section ratio is displayed, but the displayed advantageous section ratio is a numerical value with the decimal point rounded down as a result of the calculation.

The pull-in rate (PB) is the probability that the desired symbol to be stopped on the effective line can be stopped on the effective line from the moment the stop switch is operated until the reel stops (maximum number of moving frames). Shown.
Then, if the stop switch is not operated at an appropriate reel position (at an operation timing at which the target symbol can be stopped at the effective line within the range of the maximum number of moving frames), the target symbol is stopped at the effective line (up to the effective line). The inability to pull in) is referred to as "PB (pull-in rate) ≠ 1".
On the other hand, "PB" indicates that the target symbol can always be stopped (pulled in) to the effective line regardless of the position of the reel at the moment when the stop switch is operated (regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch). = 1 ".

Then, "PB = 1" has a case where all reels are so and a case where only a specific (some) reel is so for the combination.
In the present embodiment, the maximum number of moving frames is set to "4", and when the target symbols are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols or less, "PB = 1" and exceeds 5 symbols (6 symbols or more). When arranged at intervals, "PB ≠ 1". In particular, the number of symbols on the reels of the present embodiment is set to "20", and if four symbols are arranged at intervals of five symbols, the symbols are "PB = 1".

When the game progresses with "N-1" game, "N" game, "N + 1" game, ... ("N" is an integer of 2 or more), the current game is "N" game. When it is an eye, the game of the "N" game is referred to as "this time game". Further, the game of the "N-1" game is referred to as a "previous game".
On the other hand, the game of the "N + 1" game is referred to as the "next game".

The "ball payout rate" is a value calculated by the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out / the number of medals to be inserted. It is a state, and when it is less than "1", the number of medals is reduced.
Further, the "expected value of the number of medals to be paid out" is calculated by the sum of "probability of winning the winning number x number of payouts" for all the winning combinations to be drawn in the game.

Furthermore, the "difference number" is a value calculated by "the number of medals paid out (the number of medals actually paid out or the expected value of the number of medals paid out) -the number of medals inserted". When the number of medals inserted is "3", if the number of medals paid out (expected value) is "3", the difference number is "± 0", and if the number of medals paid out (expected value) exceeds "3", When the difference number exceeds "0" and the medal payout number (expected value) is less than "3", the difference number becomes less than "0".

"Bet" means betting a medal (game medium) in order to play a game. In the present embodiment, the number of bets (specified number) that can be played is set to 3 when the accessory is not operating (during a normal game). On the other hand, while the accessory (1BB) is operating, the number of bets (specified number) that can be played is set to two. To bet a medal, either care for the actual medal through the medal slot or operate the bet switch to bet the stored medals.
The "game medium" is a medal in the present embodiment, but in the case of an enclosed game machine, for example, electronic information is used as the game medium. In addition, "electronic information" means, for example, when money (banknotes) is inserted into a lending machine, it is converted into electronic information corresponding to the money, and a part or all of the electronic information is played by the game machine. It can be stored in a game machine as a game medium for performing the above.
In addition, the display of the accessory ratio, etc., which will be described later, can be applied not only to slot machines but also to bullet game machines, so the "game medium" includes not only medals but also game balls. Is done.

"Storage" means crediting medals inside the slot machine 10, unlike the above-mentioned "bet". The term "storage" may be used to include a bet, but in the present specification, the term "storage" is used to mean not to include a "bet". In the present embodiment, the maximum (limit) number of sheets that can be stored is set to "50" regardless of the gaming state or the like. When a small role wins and a medal is paid out, the medal is accumulated. In addition, when medals are maintained and inserted from the medal insertion slot and the maximum number of medals has already been bet, the inserted medals are stored. Therefore, when a medal is maintained and inserted from the medal insertion slot, it may be bet or stored.

It should be noted that the slot machine 10 "paying out" a medal to the player and the player "acquiring" the medal are equivalent. Therefore, from the viewpoint of the slot machine 10, it is "payout of medals", and from the viewpoint of the player, it is "acquisition of medals". Therefore, there are a case of referring to "payout (number of sheets)" (for example, payout means 67) and a case of referring to "acquisition (number of sheets)" (for example, acquisition number display LED 78), both of which have the same meaning.

In the present specification, a numerical value having a "B" at the end (particularly, 8 bits) means a binary number. Similarly, a number with an "H" at the end means a hexadecimal number. Specifically, for example, a numerical value indicating "16" in decimal is expressed as "00010000 (B)" in binary and "10 (H)" in hexadecimal. Further, a numerical value meaning a decimal number is expressed as "16 (D)" as necessary.
However, when it is clear which of the binary number, the decimal number, and the hexadecimal number is, the suffixes of "B", "D", and "H" may be omitted, respectively.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings and the like.
<First Embodiment>
FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of the slot machine 10 in the present embodiment.
As a typical control board provided in the slot machine 10, a main control board 50 and a sub control board 80 are provided.
The main control board 50 has an input port 51 and an output port 52, and includes an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and the like (it does not mean that only those shown in FIG. 1 are provided).

In FIG. 1, the main control board 50 and peripheral devices for game progress including operation switches such as a bet switch 40 are electrically connected to each other via an input port 51 or an output port 52. The input port 51 is a connection unit to which a signal such as an operation switch is input, and the output port 52 is a connection unit for transmitting a signal to a peripheral device such as a motor 32.
In FIG. 1, the input peripheral device is indicated by an arrow pointing from the main control board 50 to the peripheral device, and the output peripheral device is indicated by an arrow pointing from the main control board 50 to the peripheral device. It is shown (the same applies to the sub control board 80).

The RWM 53 is a storage medium capable of storing (updating) various data (variables) based on the progress of a game or the like. Data (total number of games, etc.) necessary for displaying the management information described later is stored in the RWM 53.
The ROM 54 is a storage medium for storing programs and various data (for example, a data table) necessary for the progress of the game.

The main CPU 55 refers to a CPU provided on the main control board 50, executes a program necessary for the progress of the game, performs calculations, and the like. To pay out, etc.
The main CPU 55 has a built-in register. In particular, in the present embodiment, a plurality of registers (for example, A register to L register, transmission register, etc.) are provided.

Further, on the main control board 50, an MPU including an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and a register is mounted. The RWM 53 and ROM 54 may be provided externally in addition to those mounted inside the MPU.
An MPU including an RWM83, a ROM84, and a subCPU85 is mounted on the sub-control board 80 described later. The RWM83 and ROM84 may be provided externally in addition to those mounted inside the MPU.

In FIG. 1, the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 are sent to the inside of the medal selector.
As shown in FIG. 1, the medal selector includes a passage sensor 43a, a blocker 45, and a closing sensor 44 (but is not limited thereto), and is electrically connected to the main control board 50.
When a medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 43, it is first detected by the passage sensor 43a.

Further, a blocker 45 is provided on the downstream side of the passage sensor 43a. The blocker 45 is for permitting / disallowing the insertion of medals, and when the insertion of medals is not permitted, the blocker 45 forms a medal passage for returning the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 from the payout slot. To do. On the other hand, when the insertion of medals is permitted, a medal passage for guiding the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 to the hopper 35 is formed.

Here, the blocker 45 is in a state of disallowing the insertion of medals during the game (from the start of rotation of the reels 31 to the end of the payout corresponding to the winning combination when all the reels 31 are stopped and the winning combination is won). To do. That is, the blocker 45 permits the insertion of medals at least when the game is not performed.

On the downstream side of the blocker 45, a closing sensor 44 (a plurality of optical sensors) is provided. Therefore, the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 is configured to be detected by the passage sensor 43a and then further detected by the insertion sensor 44.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, on the main control board 50, a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, a (left, middle, right) stop switch 42, and a settlement switch 46 are electrically operated as operation switches operated by the player. Is connected.
The bet switch 40 (40a or 40b) is a switch operated by the player when betting the stored medals for the game this time. In the present embodiment, a 1-bet switch 40a for inserting one medal and a 3-bet switch 40b for inserting three (maximum number or a specified number) medals are provided.
Not limited to this, a bet switch for two bets may be provided.

Further, the specified number of the present embodiment is set to 3 when the accessory is not activated and 2 when the accessory is activated, but when the 1-bet switch 40a is operated (pressed) twice, 2 medals are used. Can be inserted, and three medals can be inserted by operating (pressing) three times. Further, while the accessory is operating, two medals (specified number) can be inserted at one time by operating the 3-bet switch 40b.

Further, the start switch 41 is a switch operated by the player when starting the reels 31 (all of the left, middle, and right).
Furthermore, the stop switch 42 is a switch provided by three corresponding reels 31 (left, middle, right) and operated by the player when the corresponding reels 31 are stopped.
Further, the settlement switch 46 is a switch operated by the player when refunding (paying out) medals bet and / or stored (credited) inside the slot machine 10.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a display board 75 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. In reality, a relay board is provided between the main control board 50 and the display board 75, and the main control board 50 and the relay board, and the relay board and the display board 75 are connected to each other. In No. 1, the illustration of the relay board is omitted. As described above, the main control board 50 and the display board 75 may be directly connected by a harness or the like, but another board may be interposed between them.
Further, the control boards are not limited to being directly connected by a harness or the like, and may be connected via another board (relay board or the like). For example, one or more other separate boards (relay board, etc.) may be interposed between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80.

The display board 75 is equipped with a storage number display LED 76, an advantageous section display LED 77, and an acquisition number display LED 78. These LEDs 76 to 78 are provided in the vicinity of the operation switch operated by the player, and are provided at positions that the player can always see. It is not necessary that all the LEDs 76 to 78 are provided on one display board 75, and a plurality of display boards 75 such as display boards 75A, 75B, ... Are provided, and any display board 75 is provided. It suffices that any LED 76 to 78 is provided in the above.

FIG. 2 shows the actual positional relationship (arrangement) of the storage number display LED76, the advantageous section display LED77, the acquisition number display LED78, the settlement switch 46, the 1-bet switch 40a, and the 3-bet switch 40b on the front side of the slot machine 10. It is a plan view.
Further, in FIG. 2, a display board 75 (indicated by a dotted line in FIG. 2) is arranged inside the slot machine 10 below the stored number display LED 76, the advantageous section display LED 77, and the acquired number display LED 78. ing.

The stored number display LED 76 is an LED that displays the number of medals stored inside the slot machine 10, and is composed of a digit 1 that displays the upper digit and a digit 2 that displays the lower digit. That is, the stored number display LED 76 displays two digits.
Here, the “digit” means a display unit (display), and in particular, in the present embodiment, it is composed of a seven-segment LED (so-called 7-segment LED) and a segment DP (decimal point, which is a dot-shaped LED that displays a decimal point). Has been done.
As shown in FIG. 2, there are four digits of digits 1 to 4 mounted on the display board 75, but in the present embodiment, there are nine digits, and the other digits are the main control board. It is mounted on the 60 (details will be described later).

The stored number display LED 76 displays the number of stored medals, and in the present embodiment, displays a number between "00" and "50" (integer).
For example, in a state where no medals are bet and stored, the display of the stored number display LED76 is "00". Here, when one medal is cared for, the one medal is bet for the game. If two more medals are added, three medals will be bet for the game (when the specified number is three). Therefore, when the number of medals maintained is up to three, the medals are bet and are not stored. When the medals are further maintained, the medals are stored inside the slot machine 10, and the number of stored medals is displayed by the stored number display LED 76.

In this embodiment, up to 50 medals can be stored. Therefore, when the number of stored medals reaches 50 (when "50" is displayed on the stored number display LED 76), no more medals are stored. In this state, if a medal is maintained from the medal slot 43, the blocked medal is returned from the payout slot by the blocker 45.

Here, when a winning combination (excluding replay) with a medal payout wins and a medal corresponding to that role is paid out, priority is given to the actual payout of the medal from the payout port, and the inside of the slot machine 10 is used. The medals are stored. For example, when the number of stored cards before winning a winning combination is "10" and the winning number of 9 cards is won, the display of the storage number display LED 76 is updated from "10" to "19".

Furthermore, when the number of stored sheets exceeds "50" at the time of winning the winning combination, the amount exceeding "50" is actually paid out from the payout slot. For example, when the number of medals stored is "47" before the winning combination and 9 medals are paid out by winning the 9-card combination, 3 medals are stored and the stored number becomes "50", which exceeds "50". Six cards will be paid out from the payout slot.

Further, when the replay is won, the medals are not stored or paid out, and the number of medals bet in the game is automatically bet for the replay. For example, when the game is played with 3 bets (3 cards) and the replay wins, 3 medals are automatically bet. Then, since the automatic bet based on the winning of the replay is the insertion of a medal for performing the replay, the medal cannot be settled even if the settlement (return) operation is performed after that.

In addition, in the "Rules for Approval of Game Machines and Type Approval, etc. (hereinafter, simply referred to as" rules ")", when the combination of symbols corresponding to the replay stops at the valid line, the condition device for the replay is used. It is interpreted as an operation, not a "winning". However, in the present application (the present specification, etc.), the replay is also treated as one of the roles (replaying role), and the combination of the symbols corresponding to the replay stops at the effective line, which is referred to as "replay winning".

Further, the advantageous section display LED 77 is composed of the segment DP of the digit 2. The advantageous section display LED 77 is controlled to be turned off in the normal section and the standby section, but is controlled to be turned on during the advantageous section. Therefore, the player can determine at a glance whether or not he / she is currently staying in the advantageous section by confirming the lighting / extinguishing state of the advantageous section display LED 77.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 2, the advantageous section display LED 77 is located in the vicinity of the settlement switch 46. Therefore, when the player finishes the game and has a storage medal (for example, when "10" is displayed on the storage number display LED 76), the player operates the settlement switch 46, but at that time, It can be easily confirmed by the off state of the advantageous section display LED 77 that the section is not in the advantageous section. Further, in the present embodiment, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, in principle, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before the settlement switch 46 can be operated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from ending the game against the intention of the player even though the section is in the advantageous section (or the advantageous section from the next game).

Furthermore, the acquired number display LED 78 is an LED that displays the number of payouts (the number of acquired players) when a winning combination is won, and is composed of a digit 3 that displays the upper digit and a digit 4 that displays the lower digit. ing. Therefore, the acquired number display LED 78 displays two digits in the same manner as the stored number display LED 76.
The display of the acquired number display LED78 is "00" when there are no medals to be paid out. For example, when the 9-card combination described later wins and 9 medals are paid out, the acquired number display LED78 displays. It changes from "00" to "09".
The acquired number display LED 78 may be controlled to turn off when there are no medals to be paid out. Alternatively, the upper digit (digit 3) may be turned off and only the lower digit (digit 4) may be displayed as "0".

Further, the acquired number display LED 78 normally displays the acquired number, but functions as an LED for displaying the content (type) of the error when an error occurs. For example, when the front door of the slot machine 10 is opened and a door open error is detected, the error number "dE" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.
Furthermore, the acquired number display LED 78 functions as an LED that displays an advantageous operation mode (push order instruction information) when the instruction function is activated. Therefore, the acquired number display LED 78 in the present embodiment is an LED that also displays the acquired number, the error content, and the advantageous operation mode by operating the instruction function. Note that the advantageous push order notification when the instruction function is activated is also executed by the image display device 23 connected to the sub control board 80.

Here, in the present specification, the display of the push order using the acquired number display LED 78 by the main control board 50 is referred to as "operation of the instruction function", and the display of the push order by the sub control board 80 is "notification of the push order". It is called.
Further, as shown in FIG. 20 described later, a number corresponding to an advantageous push order is referred to as a “push order instruction number”.
Further, the push order displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 by the operation of the instruction function, for example, information such as "= 1" in FIG. 20, is referred to as "push order instruction information". That is, when the instruction function is activated, the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.

FIG. 3 is a plan view showing other digits (digits 5 to 9) mounted on the main control board 50. In FIG. 3, (a) shows Example 1 and (b) shows Example 2.
The main control board 50 is housed in a transparent board case 16 and sealed for security reasons. The main control board 50 cannot be accessed (the board case 16 cannot be opened) unless the crimped portion 16a of the board case 16 is destroyed. In FIG. 3, the main control boards 50 (50A and 50B) are shown so as to be transparent without being blocked by the board case 16. The crimped portion 16a may also be referred to as a sealing member.

On the board case 16, stickers showing proof that it is a regular main control board 50, a serial number, an opening record of the crimped portion 16a, etc. are affixed, but these stickers may obstruct the view. Digits 5 to 9 are mounted on the main control board 50 so as not to be present.
The digit 5 is a set value display LED 73, which is an LED that displays the current set value when the setting is confirmed or the setting is changed. The set value display LED 73 does not necessarily have to be mounted on the main control board 50, and can also be used as, for example, the back side of the front door, the stored number display LED 76, or the acquired number display LED 78.

Digits 6 to 9 are management information display LEDs 74. In order to ensure the visibility of the management information display LED 74, for example, for one digit housing, in FIG. 3A,
It is preferable to design the size of width m1 × height n ≧ 36 square millimeters. Alternatively, when the management information display LED 74 is used as one horizontally long (width m2) digit housing,
It is preferable to design the size of width m2 × height n ÷ 4 (number of digits) ≧ 36 square millimeters.

In FIG. 3, in Example 1 of (a), the number of main control boards 50 is one, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as in Example 2 of (b), the main control board 50 is composed of a plurality of separate boards. However, each board may be connected by a harness or the like. However, even if the main control board 50 is composed of a plurality of separate boards, it is necessary to house the entire main control board 50 in the board case 16 and seal it.
In the example of FIG. 3B, the main control boards 50 are two main control boards 50A and 50B, connectors are provided on the main control boards 50A and 50B, respectively, and the connectors are connected by a harness. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a connector capable of directly connecting the main control boards 50A and 50B may be used, and a harness may not be used (the same applies to FIG. 42B described later).
Further, the set value display LED 73 is provided on the main control board 50A side, but the management information display LED 74 is mounted on the main control board 50B. That is, the main control board 50B also serves as a display board for mounting the management information display LED 74.

Further, in the management information display LED 74, in addition to the case where the management information display LED 74 is arranged in one horizontal row as shown in Example 1 of (a), for example, the digits 6 and 7 are arranged in the upper row as in Example 2 of (b). , Digits 8 and 9 may be arranged in the lower row.

FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits 1 to 9, segments A to G, and segment DP.
As described above, each digit is composed of seven rod-shaped segments A to G and one dot-shaped segment DP, and the segments A to G (7 pieces) form a so-called 7-segment display. ..

As shown in FIG. 4, for example, in the digit 1, the segments A to G constitute the upper digit 7-segment of the stored number display LED 76, and the segment DP is unused.
Further, among the digits 2, the segments A to G form the lower digit 7-segment of the stored number display LED 76, and the segment DP is used as the advantageous section display LED 77.
Furthermore, each of the segments A to G of the digits 3 and 4 constitutes 7 segments of the upper digit and the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78, respectively, and the segment DP is unused.

Further, among the digits 5, the segments A to G form the 7-segment of the set value display LED 73, and the segment DP is an LED that lights up during the setting change. That is, among the set value display LEDs 73, when only the 7-segment is lit, it indicates that the setting is being confirmed, and when the 7-segment and the segment DP are lit, it indicates that the setting is being changed. The segment DP of the set value display LED 73 is not necessarily limited to such usage. For example, the segment DP of the set value display LED 73 may be a segment that lights up when the set value is fixed during the setting change.

Segments 6 to 9 constitute the management information display LED 74, and segments 6 and 7 display the information type of the management information. Further, segments 8 and 9 display numerical values corresponding to the information types displayed in segments 6 and 7 among the management information. The segment DPs of digits 6-9 are unused. However, when the management information display LED 74 is turned on, it is also possible to turn on the segment DP of the digit 7. Further, by turning on the segment DP of the digit 7, the boundary between the digits 6 and 7 indicating the information type and the digits 8 and 9 indicating the numerical value can be clarified and the confirmation can be facilitated.

Further, FIG. 4 shows a configuration diagram of segment data. For example, when "0" is displayed on the digit 1, the segments A to F are turned on and the segments G and DP are turned off, so that the segment data is "00111111 (B)".
Further, when "1" is displayed on the digit 2 and the segment B, C, and DP are turned on during the advantageous section, the segment data is "10000110 (B)". That is, by setting the most significant bit (8th bit) of the segment data of the digit 2 to "0" or "1", the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off or turned on. Thereby, by determining whether the 8th bit of the segment data of the digit 2 is "0" or "1", it is possible to determine whether or not the segment data is in the advantageous section.

In FIG. 1, a motor 32 or the like of a symbol display device is electrically connected to the main control board 50.
The symbol display device includes a reel 31 for displaying a symbol (three in this embodiment), a motor 32 for driving each reel 31, and a reel sensor 33 for detecting the position of the reel 31.

The motor 32 is for rotating the reels 31, is connected to the rotation center of each reel 31, and is controlled by the reel control means 65 described later. Here, the reel 31 is composed of a left reel 31, a middle reel 31, and a right reel 31, and the stop switch 42 operated when the left reel 31 is stopped is the left stop switch 42, and when the middle reel 31 is stopped. The stop switch 42 to be operated is the middle stop switch 42, and the stop switch 42 to be operated when stopping the right reel 31 is the right stop switch 42.

The reel 31 has a ring shape, and a reel tape on which a plurality of types of symbols (symbols constituting a combination of symbols corresponding to the combinations) are printed is attached to the outer peripheral surface thereof. The specific arrangement of the symbols on the reel 31 will be described later.
Further, each reel 31 is provided with one (or two or more) indexes. The index is provided on the peripheral side surface of the reel 31, for example, in a convex shape, and is used when detecting whether or not the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position, whether or not it has made one rotation, and the like. Then, each index is detected by the reel sensor 33. The signal of the reel sensor 33 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. Then, when the index detects (turns off) the reel sensor 33, the input signal is input to the main control board 50, and it is detected that the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position.

Further, the symbol on the reference position at the moment when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31 is stored in the ROM 54 in advance. As a result, it is possible to detect the symbol on the reference position at the moment when the index is detected.

Further, a medal payout device is electrically connected to the main control board 50. The medal payout device includes a hopper 35 for storing medals, a hopper motor 36 that is driven when the medals of the hopper 35 are paid out from the payout port, and a payout for detecting medals paid out from the hopper motor 36. A sensor 37 is provided.

The medals that have been maintained and received from the medal slot 43 are formed so as to be housed in the hopper 35 through a predetermined passage (also referred to as a “shoot portion”).
The payout sensor 37 is a pair of optical sensors arranged at a predetermined distance, and is configured to be detected by the other payout sensor 37 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the detection of the medal by the payout sensor 37. Has been done. Then, it is determined whether or not the medals have been correctly paid out based on the timing at which the pair of payout sensors 37 are turned on / off respectively.

For example, when the signals of both payout sensors 37 are off even though the hopper motor 36 is driven, it is determined that no medal has been paid out, and a hopper error (no medal) is detected. Will be done.
On the other hand, when at least one of the signals of the payout sensor 37 remains ON, it is detected that the medal is jammed.

Further, the power switch 11 is a switch for turning on / off the power of the slot machine 10.
The setting key switch 12 is a switch that is turned on when the setting key is inserted from the setting key insertion slot and is rotated 90 degrees to the right (clockwise), and is turned on when the setting is confirmed or the setting is changed.

The setting switch 13 is a switch that is operated when changing the set value. For example, the set value is added by "1" each time the setting is changed. In this embodiment, the set value has settings 1 to 6, and during the setting change, each time the setting switch 13 is operated, the set value changes from "1" → "2" → ... → "6" → It switches from "1" to ... One of the set values is displayed during the setting change, and when the start switch 41 is operated, the displayed set value is confirmed.

Further, when the power switch 11 is turned on while the reset switch 14 is turned on, the reset, that is, the initialization process is performed, and the predetermined data stored in the RWM 53 is cleared.
Further, the door switch 15 is a switch that is turned on when the front door (not shown) of the slot machine 10 is opened, and is for detecting the open / closed state of the front door.

Furthermore, an external signal (outer end signal) to the external centralized terminal plate 100 is output from a part of the output port 52.
Here, the "external signal" is a signal to be output to the outside of the slot machine 10 (such as a hall computer 200 or a data counter installed in a hall) via the external centralized terminal plate 100. In the present embodiment, an external signal (1BB signal, RB signal, advantageous section signal), an external signal indicating that an error or power failure has occurred in the slot machine 10, and opening of the front door of the slot machine 10 are shown. External signals, medal insertion signals, medal payout signals, etc. are provided.

In FIG. 1, the sub-control board 80 controls the selection and output of effects (information) during a game and a game standby.
Here, the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 are electrically connected, and the main control board 50 (control command transmission means 71 described later) is unidirectionally connected to the sub control board 80 by parallel communication. Send the information (control command) required for the output of the production.
The main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 are not limited to being electrically connected, and may be connected by using an optical communication means. Further, both the electrical connection and the optical communication connection are not limited to parallel communication, but may be serial communication, and serial communication and parallel communication may be used in combination.

Like the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub CPU 85, and the like.
The following peripheral devices for effect such as the effect lamp 21 as shown in FIG. 1 are electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 via the input port 81 or the output port 82. However, the peripheral devices for production are not limited to these.
The RWM 83 is a storage medium that can temporarily store data or the like captured when the sub CPU 85 controls the effect.
Further, the ROM 84 is a storage medium for storing various data and the like when a lottery related to the production is performed as the production data.

The effect lamp 21 is composed of, for example, an LED or the like, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the effect lamp 21 is lit in a predetermined pattern. The effect lamp 21 is a back lamp and reel 31 that are arranged on the inner peripheral side of each reel 31 and illuminate the symbols displayed on the reel 31 (three consecutive symbols that can be seen from the display window 17) from behind. Includes a fluorescent lamp that illuminates the design on the reel 31 from the top of the reel 31, a frame lamp that is arranged in front of the front door of the slot machine 10 and blinks when a winning combination is won.

Further, the speaker 22 outputs a predetermined sound when a predetermined condition is satisfied in order to perform various effects during the game.
Furthermore, the image display device 23 is composed of a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a dot display, etc., and various effect images (correct answer pressing order, effects corresponding to the lottery result of the condition device, etc.) during the game, and It displays game information (the number of games played, the number of acquired cards, etc., when the character is operating or in an advantageous section).
In addition, the cross key 24 and the menu button 25 are used when displaying information intended by the player (including a two-dimensional code which is the player's game history), or when the hall manager (store manager, etc.) changes various settings. It is used when doing so.

Subsequently, the roles of the present embodiment, the combination of symbols, and the like will be described.
FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a symbol arrangement of the reels 31 in this embodiment. In FIG. 5, the symbol numbers are also shown. For example, on the left reel 31, the symbol number 0 is "bell A".
As shown in FIG. 5, in the present embodiment, each reel 31 is equally divided into 20 frames, and a predetermined symbol is displayed on each frame.
In the figure, "blank" does not mean that the symbol is not displayed at all, and a predetermined symbol corresponding to the "blank" is displayed.
In addition, "Bell A", "Bell B", and "Bell C" are symbols having similar appearances, but different symbols.

Further, FIG. 6A shows the positional relationship between the display window (transparent window) 17 provided on the front door (front door; not shown) of the slot machine 10 and each reel 31, and the effective line (design). It is a figure which shows (a display line which displays a combination).
In this embodiment, three reels 31 are provided in parallel in the horizontal direction (left reel 31, middle reel 31, and right reel 31). Further, each reel 31 is arranged so that three consecutive symbols can be seen from the display window 17. Therefore, a total of nine symbols (frames) are arranged so as to be visible from the display window 17 of the slot machine 10. The number at the bottom right of each symbol indicates the symbol number.

Further, FIG. 6B illustrates the designation of the symbol position in the present specification. In the present specification, for each reel 31, the symbol positions at the time of stop that can be seen from the display window 17 are referred to as "upper", "middle", and "lower" in order from the top. , "Left middle row", "Left lower row".
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 6A, effective lines are set for the nine symbols that can be seen from the display window 17.

Here, the "effective line" is a symbol combination line (display line) that is an arrangement line of symbols when the reel 31 is stopped and forms a combination of symbols, and is a symbol corresponding to any combination. When the combination stops at that line, it is the line that wins the role. In the present embodiment, one valid line (a straight line passing through "lower left"-"middle middle"-"upper right") is defined, and all other symbol combination lines are invalid lines. There is.

The invalid line is a line that is not set as a valid line among the symbol combination lines, and even if the combination of symbols corresponding to any of the combinations stops at that line, the profit is given according to the combination. This is a line that does not pay out medals. That is, the invalid line is a line that is not the target of establishing the combination of symbols in the first place.

Further, conventionally, slot machines in which the number of effective lines differs depending on the number of medals inserted have been known. For example, when the number of medals inserted is 1, the number of effective lines is 1, when the number of medals inserted is 2, the number of effective lines is set to 3, and when the number of medals inserted is 3, the number of effective lines is set to 5. And so on. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, three or two medals are inserted to play the game, and in all the games, one line shown in FIG. 6 (A) becomes an effective line. The number of effective lines does not change depending on the number of medals inserted. Therefore, in the present specification, the term "effective line" refers to the line shown in FIG. 6 (A).

7 to 12 are diagrams showing the types of combinations (combinations included in the condition device drawn by the combination lottery means 61 described later), the number of payouts, and the combination of symbols in the present embodiment. In addition, although it is not a combination, FIG. 12 shows pattern symbols 01 to 03 as a combination of symbols displayed when the winning combination is missed when a specific condition device is won (numbers "101" to "101" to "120").

The roles of the present embodiment are roughly classified into a special role, a replay (replaying role), and a small role.
Then, the combination of symbols corresponding to each combination and the number of payouts at the time of winning are determined. When all reels 31 are stopped, if the combination of symbols corresponding to any of the winning combinations is stopped at the effective line (the winning combination is won, the same applies hereinafter), the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out.
However, the number of payouts at the time of winning a special role is set to 0. In the replay, medals are automatically inserted (replay).

In FIGS. 7 to 12, the "specified number 3" displayed on the number of payouts and the like indicates the number of payouts and the like when the specified number is 3 (when the accessory is not operating, that is, the number of inserts during the normal game). , "Specified number 2" indicates the number of payouts when the specified number is 2 (when the accessory is activated, that is, the number of inserted cards during the special game). For example, the replay 01 of the number "3" indicates that the replay is performed with the specified number of three cards, and the "-" of the specified number of two cards indicates that the lottery is not performed.

In FIG. 7, the numbers "1" and "2" correspond to special roles (roles). In the present embodiment, only 1BB is provided as a special role, and 1BB has two types (1BBA and 1BBB).
The special role is a role of shifting from a normal game to a special game.
If you win 1BB, you will not be paid out medals in this game, but from the next game, you will shift to the 1BB game, which is equivalent to a special game (operation of the character).
During the 1BB game (when the character is activated), the ball output rate is set to exceed "1", so that medals can be expected to be obtained more than when the character is not activated, which is an advantageous game for the player. ..

In addition, the replay (replay role) is a role that enables the replay to maintain the number of medals inserted in this game (automatically bet the medals).
As shown in FIG. 7, the replay of the present embodiment includes replays 01 to 06 (numbers "3" to "13").
Replays 02 and 03 are replays that, if a prize is won in a specific RT, will be transferred to another RT. Therefore, these replays are also referred to as transitional replays.

More specifically, when the replay 02 wins in RT2, the game shifts to RT3 (RT advantageous to the player) from the next game. Therefore, the replay 02 is also referred to as a promotion replay.
Further, when the replay 03 wins in RT3, the game shifts to RT2 (RT which is more disadvantageous to the player than the previous RT) from the next game. Therefore, the replay 03 is also referred to as a fall (demotion) replay.

Further, the replays 04 and 05 are first used as control replays for the purpose of increasing the types of condition devices by winning a plurality of replays in duplicate. In this embodiment, among the condition devices described later, Replay A replay included in B2, B3, C2, C3, or E. When the replays B2, B3, C2, or C3 are won, the replay 04 or 05 as the control replay does not stop at the effective line.

Further, the replays 04 and 05 are secondly used as a rare replay and are included in the replay E of the condition device described later. When Replay E is won during the advantageous section, the addition of the advantageous section is executed. It should be noted that the addition may not always be executed, but the addition lottery may be performed.
Further, the replay 06 is a replay drawn by lottery during the operation of 1BB, and is included in the replay D of the condition device described later. When Replay D is won during the advantageous section, the addition of the advantageous section is executed. It should be noted that the addition may not always be executed, but the addition lottery may be performed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 7 to 11, the small combination includes small combinations 01 to 40 (numbers “14” to “100”). Small wins 01 and 02 are small wins (small wins corresponding to higher bells) that win a prize in the correct push order when the push order bell is won, which will be described later. In addition, the small wins 03 to 34 are small wins (small wins corresponding to the cheap bells) that can be won (PB ≠ 1) in the incorrect push order when the push order bell is won.
Furthermore, the small roles 35 to 38 are rare small roles (small roles corresponding to watermelon or cherry).
Further, the small winning combinations 39 and 40 are small winning combinations that can be won only when the specified number is two, that is, when the accessory is activated.

As described above, the pattern symbols 01 to 03 are not the winning combination itself, but appear when the winning combination is missed (when the winning combination is not won) when the pressing order is incorrect when the push order bell is won. It is a combination of symbols. Further, the pattern symbol is a symbol that shifts RT (shifts to RT2 in this embodiment) when the combination of the symbols stops at the effective line at a specific RT (non-RT, RT1, or RT3 in this embodiment). It is a combination. In the present embodiment, the pattern symbols 01 to 03 are made to appear without fail when the winning combination is missed (when the winning combination is not won) when the push order is incorrect when the small combination B group is won. However, other combinations of symbols (not the combination itself) may appear.

In each of the above-mentioned roles, if the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination does not stop at the effective line in the game in which the combination is won, the combination that is carried over to the next game and the combination that is not carried over is defined. ..
The carry-over role is 1BB in this embodiment. When 1BB is won, the winning information of the 1BB is controlled to be carried over to the next game or later in the game until the 1BB is won.

On the other hand, the winning of 1BB is carried over, while the small roles and replays other than 1BB are not carried over. When a small winning combination or replay is won in the lottery of the conditional device, the winning combination is valid only in this game, and the winning is not carried over to the next game or later. That is, in the game in which these winning combinations are won, the reel 31 is stopped and controlled so that the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning winning combination can be won, but at the end of the game regardless of whether or not the winning combination is won. , The right to the winning combination will be extinguished.

When starting the game, the player inserts medals stored in advance by operating the bet switch 40 (storage bet), or cares for and inserts medals from the medal insertion slot 43 (care bet). When the start switch 41 is operated with a specified number of medals bet, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. When the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65 described later) receives this signal, the combination lottery means 61 draws a combination, and all the motors 32 are driven and controlled to drive and control all the reels. The 31 is controlled to rotate. By rotating the reel 31 by the motor 32 in this way, the symbol on the reel 31 is moved and displayed in the vertical direction in the display window 17 at a predetermined speed.

Then, by pressing the stop switch 42, the player stops the rotation of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 (for example, the left reel 31 corresponding to the left stop switch 42). When the stop switch 42 is operated, the signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. Upon receiving this signal, the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65 described later) drives and controls the motor 32 corresponding to the stop switch 42, and corresponds to the winning combination lottery result of the winning combination lottery means 61. The stop control of the reel 31 related to the motor 32 is performed so as to be performed.

Then, the game result of this game is displayed by the combination of the symbols when all the reels 31 are stopped. Further, when the combination of symbols corresponding to any of the winning combinations stops at the valid line (when the winning combination is won), the medals corresponding to the winning winning combination are paid out.

Next, a specific configuration of the main control board 50 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 1, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the following combination lottery means 61 and the like. The following means in the present embodiment are examples, and are not limited to the means shown in the present embodiment.

The combination lottery means 61 draws (determines, selects) a condition device (winning combination). Therefore, the winning combination lottery means 61 is also referred to as a condition device determination (lottery or selection) means, a winning combination determination (lottery or selection) means, and the like.
In addition, "winning of the condition device" is also referred to as a combination lottery result, a lottery result, a winning number, a winning result, and the like.

The combination lottery means 61 is based on, for example, a random number generating means (hardware random number or the like) for lottery, a random number extracting means for extracting random numbers generated by the random number generating means, and a random number value extracted by the random number extracting means. It is provided with a determination means for determining whether or not the condition device has been won and the winning condition device.

The random number generation means generates random numbers in a predetermined region (for example, "0" to "65535" in decimal numbers). The random number is, for example, a random number that the counter that counts 1 in 200 n (nano) sec keeps counting in the range of "0" to "65535" as one cycle, and is a random number while the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on. Keep counting.

The random number extraction means extracts the random numbers generated by the random number generation means at a predetermined time, in the present embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated (on) by the player. The determination means determines the condition device corresponding to the region to which the random number value belongs by collating the random number value extracted by the random number extraction means with the condition device lottery table described later. For example, if the extracted random number value belongs to the area of the winning and replay condition device number "1" (replay A), it is determined that the replay A is won.

13 to 16 are diagrams showing the types of condition devices drawn by the combination lottery means 61 and the contents of the winning combination included in each condition device.
In the following description, the condition device will be mainly described, and the details of the stop control of the reel 31 based on the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and the operation timing at the time of winning each condition device will be described in the reel control means 65. To do.

As described above, the condition device of the present embodiment does not carry over the winning information to the next game and the "character condition device" which is a condition device including any of the special roles that can carry over the winning information to the next game. It consists of a "winning and replay condition device" which is a condition device including either a small win or a replay.
The winning of the accessory condition device corresponds to the winning of 1BB in the present embodiment, and includes the accessory condition device numbers "1" and "2".
The character condition device number "0" corresponds to the non-winning of the special role, the character condition device number "1" corresponds to the winning of 1 BBA, and the character condition device number "2" corresponds to the winning of 1 BBB. Equivalent to.

Further, for example, when the replay A is won, the accessory condition device number is "0", and the winning and replay condition device numbers are "1".
On the other hand, when 1BBA is won alone, the accessory condition device number is "1", and the winning and replay condition device number is "0".

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, there is a case where 1BB and a small winning combination are duplicated. For example, when 1BBA and a small winning combination D are duplicated, the accessory condition device number is "1", and the winning and replay condition device number Is "26".
If 1BB and a small role or replay are won in duplicate, the prize for the small role or replay is prioritized in this game (the priority can be set arbitrarily). In addition, since the winning of a small role or replay is valid only in this game, the winning is not carried over to the next game, but the winning information of 1BB is carried over to the next game unless a prize is won.

Hereinafter, the winning and replay condition devices will be described.
The condition device number "0" corresponds to a non-winning combination (so-called loss).
Further, the replay A of the condition device number "1" is a single winning of the replay 01. When Replay A is won, Replay 01 wins regardless of the push order (in any push order).

Replays B1 to B3 of condition device numbers "2" to "4" (hereinafter collectively referred to as "replay B group"), replays C1 to C3 of condition device numbers "5" to "7" (hereinafter collectively referred to as "general"). Each of the above (referred to as "replay C group") is a duplicate winning of a plurality of types of replays, and is a duplicate winning including at least one of replays 01 or 02. Then, the type of replay to be won is set to be different according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42.
For example, in the replay B1 of the condition device number "2", the replay 02 wins in the push order of the left first stop, and the replay 01 wins in the case other than the left first stop (middle or right first stop).

In the case of duplicate replay winning, the replay (replaying role) wins regardless of the push order, so there is no concept of high / low medals. However, for example, when the replay B1 is won in RT2, the RT is promoted (shifted from RT2 to RT3) by winning the replay 02 at the first left stop. On the other hand, except for the first stop on the left, RT2 is maintained by winning the replay 01.
Further, when the replay C1 is won in the RT3, the RT3 is maintained by winning the replay 01 at the first left stop. On the other hand, except for the first stop on the left, RT is dropped (demoted) (shifted from RT3 to RT2) by winning Replay 03.

The replay D of the condition device number "8" is a single win of the replay 06. When Replay D is won, Replay 06 wins regardless of the push order.
Similarly, the replay E of the condition device number "9" is a duplicate winning of the replays 04 and 05. When Replay E is won, Replay 04 or 05 wins regardless of the push order. These replays 04 and 05 have a role as a rare replay. In particular, in the present embodiment, if a lottery is drawn at RT1 and Replay E is won during RT1 and the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added. It should be noted that the addition may not always be executed, but the addition lottery may be performed.

In FIG. 14, the small winning combination A of the condition device number “10” is attached to a so-called common bell, and the small winning combination 01 is independently elected. Then, when the small winning combination A is won, the small winning combination 01 always wins regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed (PB = 1).
Further, in FIGS. 14 to 15, the small combinations B1 to B12 (hereinafter collectively referred to as “small combination B group”) of the condition device numbers “11” to “22” correspond to so-called push order bells. , Small win 01 (9 bells, 9 coins) and at least one of small wins 03-34 (1 win).

When these conditional devices are won, a small winning combination 01, which is a high bell (9 bells, 9 winning combination), is awarded with "PB = 1" in the correct pressing order according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42. On the other hand, when the order is incorrect pressing, the small winning combination 03, which is a cheap bell (single combination), depends on the operation timing of the stop switch 42 (the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated). There are cases where ~ 34 wins a prize and cases where none of the small wins wins (when a pattern symbol is displayed due to omission).

In FIG. 16, the small combinations C1 to C3 (hereinafter collectively referred to as “small combination C group”) of the condition device numbers “23” to “25” are so-called pushes, as in the above small combination B group. It corresponds to a forward bell, and is a duplicate winning including a small winning combination 02 (3 bells, 3 playing cards) and a small winning combination 03-10 (1 card winning combination).
When these conditional devices are won, a small winning combination 02, which is a high bell (3 bells, 3 bindings), wins a prize according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42 with "PB = 1" when the correct answer is pressed. On the other hand, in the case of incorrect answering order, "PB = 1" and one of the small winning combination 03 to 10 which is a cheap bell (one piece combination) wins a prize. Therefore, when the small winning combination C group is won, unlike the small winning combination B group winning time, there is no case where the pattern symbol is displayed (missing). Not limited to this, there may be a case where none of the small wins is won.

When the small role B group is won, 9 cards will be paid out when the high bell is won, so when the push order is correct, the in (number of input) and out (number of payout) will be 9 and the difference in this game. The number of sheets is "+6". Therefore, the condition device is such that the number of medals increases when the push order is correct, and the number of medals decreases when the push order is incorrect (the number of payouts is 1 or 0).
On the other hand, in the small role C group, 3 cards are paid out when the high bell is won, so when the push order is correct, 3 cards are in (inserted number) and 3 out (paid out number). The difference between the two is "± 0". Therefore, when the push order is correct, the number of medals is maintained as it is, and when the push order is incorrect (the number of payouts is one), the number of medals is reduced.

It should be noted that the reason why both the push order bells for paying out 9 pieces and the push order bells for paying out 3 pieces in the correct push order are provided in order to adjust the payout rate. In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the probability that one winning combination will be won is 25% when the push order is incorrect when the small winning combination B is won, and the other 75% is a pattern symbol. Is set to be displayed (no payout when the pattern pattern is displayed). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16, when the push order is incorrect when the small winning combination C group is won, the winning combination is set to "PB = 1". In this way, by providing two types of push order bells with different numbers of payouts depending on whether the answer is correct or incorrect, and setting the winning probability appropriately, the payout rate can be set in an appropriate range. become.

The small winning combination D of the condition device number "26" corresponds to a rare small winning combination (watermelon). The small winning combination D is a single winning of the small winning combination 35, and is set to "PB ≠ 1".
Further, the small winning combination E1 of the condition device number "27" and the small winning combination E2 of the conditional device number "28" correspond to the rare small winning combination (cherry) as in the small winning combination D1. The small winning combination E1 is a duplicate winning of the small winning combination 36 and 38, and the small winning combination E2 is a duplicate winning combination including the small winning combination 37 in addition to the above small winning combination 36 and 38. When the small winning combination E1 or E2 is won, two winning combinations (small winning combination 36 or 38) will be won regardless of the push order.

The small winning combination F of the condition device number "29" is a winning combination that is drawn only during 1BB operation (during 1BB game), and is a duplicate winning of small winning combination 01 to 39. When the small role F is won, the small role 39, which is a 10-card role, wins with "PB = 1".
The small winning combination G of the condition device number "30" is a winning combination that is drawn only during 1BB operation (during 1BB game), and is a single winning of the small winning combination 40. When the small role G is won, the small role 40, which is a 9-card role, wins with "PB = 1".

17 and 18 are winning probabilities determined by the lottery table when the condition device is drawn by the combination lottery means 61, and show the number of the accessory condition devices and the winning and replay condition devices for each RT. It is a figure. Dividing the numerical values shown in FIGS. 17 and 18 by "65536" gives the winning probability. For example, the number of units for which 1 BBA is independently won is set to "20" and "10" ("30" in total) in both non-RT and RT1 to RT3. Therefore, the single winning probability of 1BBA is "30/65536".

FIG. 17 is a table of number of condition devices that are common to the settings and that can be determined to shift to the advantageous section, or that the addition of the advantageous section is executed (or the additional lottery can be performed).
Here, "common setting" means that there is no setting difference, that is, the setting 1 to the setting 6 have the same numerical value.
Then, when the condition device common to the settings is won, it may always be decided to shift to the advantageous section (decision to add during the advantageous section), or whether or not to shift to the advantageous section ( Whether or not to add during the advantageous section) may be decided by lottery. Alternatively, a conditional device that decides to shift to the advantageous section (decides to add during the advantageous section) and a conditional device that decides not to shift to the advantageous section (decides not to add during the advantageous section). It may be provided.

In the present embodiment, the condition device common to the settings shown in FIG. 17 is provided with a condition device that determines to shift to the advantageous section and a condition device that determines not to shift to the advantageous section. Further, during the advantageous section, the condition device is always set to determine to add the advantageous section.
In FIG. 17, in the normal section, “◯” means that it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, and “x” means that it is decided not to shift to the advantageous section. Further, in the advantageous section, "Δ" means that the advantageous section is decided to be added, and "x" means that the advantageous section is not added.
In FIG. 17, "○" determines to shift to the advantageous section, and "△" determines to add the advantageous section, but the present invention is not limited to this, and "○" indicates It may mean that a lottery is performed whether or not to shift to an advantageous section, and “Δ” may mean a lottery whether or not to add an advantageous section.

Further, FIG. 18 shows a conditional device and a number thereof that are not determined to shift to the advantageous section and are not determined to add the advantageous section.
In the present embodiment, the condition device that decides to shift to the advantageous section or decides to add the advantageous section is limited to the time when the condition device shown in FIG. 17 is won, and the condition device shown in FIG. 18 In the winning, none of them decides to shift to the advantageous section and does not decide to add the advantageous section.
Although the number of settings 1 and 6 is typically shown in FIG. 18, in reality, as described above, the set value has 6 stages of setting 1 to setting 6 and is set. The number of places for each value is specified.

In FIGS. 17 and 18, since the condition device including 1BBA or 1BBB is drawn only in the non-internal part, it is drawn in the non-RT, RT1 to RT3. Further, 1BBA and 1BBB have a case of winning alone and a case of winning multiple times with the small winning combination D, E1 or E2. On the other hand, the small winning combination D, E1 or E2 may be elected independently. The condition device including 1BBA or 1BBB drawn by RT4 is treated as a single winning of the small winning combination D, E1 or E2. Therefore, the total number of small wins D in RT4 is "580" to "585", and the total number of small wins E1 in RT4 is "1030". The total number of small winning combinations E2 in RT4 is "310" to "370".
Further, 1BBB is set as a winning combination when a condition device having a setting difference is won, and it is decided to shift to an advantageous section based on the winning of 1BBB, or to add an advantageous section. There is nothing.

In addition, Replay D is drawn only during 1BB operation. Furthermore, Replay E is drawn only at RT1. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, after the operation of 1BBB is completed, the process shifts to RT1. Then, if Replay E is won in this RT1, an advantageous section is added (limited to the advantageous section). Therefore, in order to set it so that it does not appear in other RTs, the replay E is drawn only in RT1.
Further, the small winning combination D and E1 are drawn only when the accessory is not activated, and are not drawn when the accessory is activated.
On the other hand, the small winning combination F and G are not drawn when the accessory is not activated, and are drawn only when the accessory is activated.

Further, in FIG. 17, the total number of single winnings of 1BBA is "30", but in the present embodiment, the number of placements "20" determined to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section and the advantageous section It is divided into an interval "10" that decides not to shift. That is, in the case of a single winning of 1BBA, if the number "20" is won, when the game is a normal section, the advantageous section is also won at the same time. On the other hand, in the case of a single winning of 1BBA, if the number "10" is won, the advantageous section will not be won.

In addition, when 1 BBA is won alone during the advantageous section, it is decided to add the advantageous section to both the number "20" and "10".
Similarly, the number of units for which the small winning combination E1 is independently won is "1000" in total, but in the present embodiment, the number of units "250" determined to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section and the advantageous section It is divided into an interval "750" that decides not to shift to.

Not limited to this, when the number of single winnings of the small winning combination E1 is set to one placement number "1000" (not divided into the numbering number "250" and the numbering number "750") and the small winning combination E1 is won. In addition, it may be decided whether or not to shift to the advantageous section by a separate lottery. For example, there is a 25% chance of deciding to move to an advantageous section and a 75% chance of not deciding to move to an advantageous section. In this way, a number that wins the advantageous section and a number that does not win the advantageous section may be provided from the beginning, but the number itself is set to one value, and when the number is won, the section shifts to the advantageous section. A lottery (two-stage lottery) may be held to decide whether or not to do so.
Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, in the case of RT4 (inside the inside), it is not determined to shift to the advantageous section, and the advantageous section is not added. Therefore, even when the small winning combination D or E1 is won, when it is RT4, it is not decided to shift to the advantageous section and the advantageous section is not added (“* 3” in FIG. 17). ..

In FIG. 18, when 1 BBB is won alone or when 1 BBB and small winning combination D are won in duplicate, no decision is made regarding the advantageous section. However, as will be described later, an opportunity to add an advantageous section is provided after the operation of 1BBB is completed (after the transition to RT1).
The small winning combination E2 has a case where the winning is duplicated with 1BBB and a case where the winning is single, but neither of them makes a decision regarding the advantageous section. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 17, when the small winning combination E1 is won, a decision regarding the advantageous section may be made for both the single winning of the small winning combination E1 and the overlapping winning with 1BBA.

Further, as shown in FIG. 18, the condition devices of the replay A, the replay B group, and the replay C group have the same settings, but they are not determined to shift to the advantageous section and are added in the advantageous section. I don't decide.
However, not limited to the examples of FIGS. 17 and 18, when the condition devices for these replays are won, it is decided to shift to an advantageous section (including a lottery) or to add an advantageous section (including a lottery). ) May be provided. Alternatively, in FIG. 18, in the replay A, the replay B group, and the replay C group, the number of settings is slightly different between the setting 1 and the setting 6 (for example, "1" is different), and the replay A, the replay B group, And the replay C group may be set separately.

In FIG. 18, the replay A is drawn at all RTs when the accessory is not activated. In addition, the replay B1 group is drawn only at RT2. Furthermore, the replay group C is drawn only at RT3. The small winning combination A, the small winning combination B group, and the small winning combination C group all have a setting difference between the setting 1 and the setting 6, but the number is the same in all RTs.

Further, as shown in the table of "special combination and small combination" in FIG. 18, in setting 1 and setting 6, the winning probability of 1BB and small combination is set higher in setting 6. Therefore, in this respect, setting 6 is more advantageous than setting 1.
Furthermore, as shown in the "Replay" table, RT3 has the highest probability of winning a replay. Then, in the advantageous section, since it is basically set to stay at RT3, not only the medals are increased by the operation of the instruction function at the time of winning the push order bell, but also the medals are less reduced by the replay winning. ..

Further, the small winning combination A, the small winning combination B group, and the small winning combination C group are all set in the condition device having a setting difference. Here, the number difference between the setting 1 and the setting 6 of the small winning combination A is "250", and the numbering difference between the setting 1 and the setting 6 of the small winning combination B group (overall) is "240 (20 × 12)". ". Therefore, the small winning combination A has a larger difference in number than the small winning combination B group. As a result, the difference in the payout rate according to the set value can be surely provided by setting the number of small winning combinations A having no winning difference according to the pushing order to a larger value.
Further, since the combination of the symbols that can be won when the small winning combination A is won and the combination of the symbols that can be won when the push order is correct when the small winning combination B is won are set to be the same (described later), the small winning combination A The set value cannot be estimated by counting the number of winnings (winnings).

Further, as shown in FIG. 18, the probability of winning the small winning combination B group is set higher than the probability of winning the small winning combination C group. Here, the maximum number of payouts is 9 when the specified number is 3, and at least 1 instruction function operating game in which the number of payouts is 9 (maximum number of payouts with the specified number of 3) during the advantageous section. Need to run twice. Therefore, in the advantageous section, it is necessary to execute the instruction function operating game at least once when the small winning combination B group is won. Therefore, by setting the winning probability of the small winning combination B group higher than the winning probability of the small winning combination C group, one instruction function operating game (small winning combination C group, replay B group, and replay C group is won). It is possible to reduce the expected number of games in the advantageous section that ends only with (excluding the games played). Furthermore, even though it is an advantageous section that ends after executing a predetermined number of games, it is less likely that the advantageous section cannot be ended because the small winning combination B group has never been won during the predetermined number of times. be able to.

The explanation is returned to FIG.
The winning flag control means 62 controls the on / off of the winning flag corresponding to each winning combination based on the lottery result by the winning combination lottery means 61. In the present embodiment, a winning flag is provided for each combination for all the combinations. Then, when any of the conditional devices is won in the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the winning flag of the winning combination included in the conditional device is turned on (the winning flag is set).

For example, in the non-internal middle game, when the replay B1 is won, the two winning flags of the replay 01 and the replay 02 included in the condition device are turned on, and the winning flags of the other combinations are turned off.
Similarly, in the non-internal medium game, when the small winning combination B1 is won, the small winning combination 01, the small winning combination 03, the small winning combination 10, the small winning combination 11, the small winning combination 18, the small winning combination 19, and the small winning combination included in the condition device. The seven winning flags of the winning combination 26 are turned on, and the winning flags of the other winning combinations are turned off.

Furthermore, as described above, the winning of small roles and replays other than 1BB is not carried over, so even if the small role or replay is won in this game and the winning flag of these roles is turned on, the game ends this time. Sometimes the winning flag is turned off.
On the other hand, since the winning of 1BB is carried over, when the winning flag of 1BB is won in this game and the winning flag related to the winning 1BB is turned on once, the on state is maintained until the 1BB is won. It will be turned off when 1BB wins.

Further, for example, when the winning combination lottery means 61 wins 1BBA and the small winning combination D more than once, the winning flag of the small winning combination 35 corresponding to the 1BBA and the small winning combination D is turned on, and both roles may not win in the game. Therefore, for example, when 1BBA does not win, the winning flag of 1BBA is kept on and the winning flag of the small winning combination 35 is turned off regardless of whether the small winning combination 35 wins or does not win.

Furthermore, for example, when 1BBA is won alone by the role lottery means 61, the 1BBA winning flag is turned on in this game, and when 1BBA is not won in this game, the 1BBA winning flag is kept on. ..
Furthermore, when the small role A1 is won in the next game, in addition to the 1BBA that has carried over the winning, the winning flag of the small role 01 is turned on, and if 1BBA does not win at the end of this game, 1BBA The winning flag of is kept on, and the winning flag of the small winning combination 01 is turned off.

The push order instruction number selection means 63 selects the push order instruction number based on the lottery result of the condition device by the combination lottery means 61. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a push order instruction number table.
The push order instruction number selection means 63 may select the push order instruction number in either the advantageous section or the normal section, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only during the advantageous section, for example. The push order instruction number may be selected. In such a case, the push order instruction number is always "A0" during the normal section.
Further, the selected push order instruction number can be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 only during the advantageous section (except for transmitting the push order instruction number "A0" during the normal section). Therefore, even if the push order instruction number is selected by the push order instruction number selection means 63 in the normal section, the push order instruction number is not transmitted to the sub control board 80.
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19, each condition device is provided with a unique push order instruction number. For example, the push order instruction number corresponding to the replay A is "A0", and the push order instruction number corresponding to the replay C3 is "A3". The push order instruction number includes "A0" to "A3".

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the relationship between the push order instruction number, the push order corresponding to the push order instruction number, and the display contents 1 and 2. The push order instruction number "A0" does not have a push order that is advantageous to the player (the push order does not cause an advantage / disadvantage, that is, the push order does not matter).
Further, the push order instruction numbers "A1" to "A3" each have a push order that is advantageous to the player. For example, the advantageous push order corresponding to the push order instruction number "A2" is the middle first stop.

The push order corresponding to the push order instruction number in the replay B group is set to the push order for winning the replay 02 (the push order for promoting RT).
Further, the push order corresponding to the push order instruction number in the replay C group is set to the push order in which the replay 01 is won (maintains RT).
Similarly, the push order corresponding to the push order instruction number in the small win B group is set to the push order in which the small win 01 (9 sheets) is won.
Further, the pushing order corresponding to the pushing order instruction number in the small winning combination C group is set to the pushing order in which the small winning combination 02 (3 sheets) is won.

Further, in FIG. 20, “display content 1” indicates content displayed by the operation of the instruction function (control of the main control board 50), and in the present embodiment, the push order instruction information to be displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 is displayed. Shown. In the present embodiment, the push order instruction numbers "A" and "0" to "3" correspond to the display of "=" and "0" to "3" of the LED (7-segment), respectively. When "=" is displayed, the segments D and G in FIG. 4 of the 7-segments are turned on (see FIG. 26 described later). Further, when the push order instruction number is "A0", no display may be performed (no segment is lit).

Furthermore, "display content 2" indicates the content displayed by the control of the sub control board 80, and in the present embodiment, it is the correct answer pressing order to be displayed on the image display device 23.
The "operation of the instruction function" means the display using the acquired number display LED 78 by the main control board 50, and the display by the control of the sub control board 80 is the "operation of the instruction function" of the present invention. Is not included.
For example, when the winning and replay condition device "11" is won in the advantageous section, the push order instruction number "A1" is selected, and when the instruction function is activated, "= 1" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. To. Further, the image display device 23 displays an image of content such as "1 ○○" that the player can understand that the left first stop is performed.

In FIG. 19, the push order instruction number (* 1) at the time of winning the small winning combination A is as follows.
When the small winning combination A is won, the small winning combination 01 wins regardless of the pushing order, so there is no advantageous pushing order. However, during the advantageous section, one of "A1" to "A3" is selected as the dummy push order instruction number. The selection rate is "1/3" respectively. By setting in this way, when the small winning combination A is won in the advantageous section, the instruction function is activated and the push order instruction information is displayed. As a result, the player cannot determine whether he or she has won the small winning combination A or the small winning combination B group in the game. The reason for setting in this way is as follows.

As shown in FIG. 18, the winning probability (number of places) of the small winning combination A is higher in the setting 6 than in the setting 1. Therefore, the set value can be estimated by counting the number of times the small winning combination 01 has won a prize in the game in which the instruction function does not operate during the advantageous section. In order to avoid such a capture, when the small winning combination A is won in the advantageous section, the instruction function is activated and the dummy push order instruction information is displayed. Of course, it is not impossible to estimate the set value by counting the number of times the small winning combination 01 won a prize in the game in which the instruction function is activated, but the number of times the small winning combination 01 won in the game in which the instruction function is not activated. More trials are required than when counting and guessing the set value.

Furthermore, in FIG. 19, the push order instruction information (* 2) at the time of winning the small winning combination E1 and E2 is as follows.
As shown in FIG. 17, when the small winning combination E1 is won in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added. However, as described above, when 1BB is won during the advantageous section and the inside is inside, the advantageous section is not added. Therefore, in the advantageous section and inside (during the game section in which the advantageous section is not added), the small winning combination E1 is won, and the combination of the symbols corresponding to the small winning combination E1 (the combination of the symbols expected to be added in the advantageous section). When a certain middle cherry) stops, it may give the player the impression of wasting money. Therefore, when the small winning combination E1 is won in the advantageous section and inside, the push order instruction number "A3" is selected, the instruction function is activated, and "right first stop" is displayed.

When the stop switch 42 is operated at the first right stop when the small winning combination E1 is won, the so-called middle-stage cherry does not stop as shown in FIG. This makes it difficult to notice the winning of the small role E1. Since the number of small winning combinations 36 or 38 that can be won when the small winning combination E1 is won is two, there is no disadvantage to the player even if the right first stop is instructed.

Further, as described above, the advantageous section has a maximum number of games set, and is set within 1500 games in the present embodiment. Therefore, even if the number of games remaining in the advantageous section is reached, when the number of games from the start of the advantageous section reaches 1500 games, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated unconditionally.
In the case of having such playability, for example, if the small winning combination E1 is won when the game is close to 1500 games in the advantageous section and the middle cherry is displayed, the player expects the addition of the advantageous section. Therefore, in the present embodiment, after 1400 games or more have been reached since the start of the advantageous section, even if the small winning combination E1 is won, the middle cherry is not displayed as in the case of winning inside. , Activate the instruction function to display the right first stop.

When the small winning combination E2 is won, as shown in FIG. 18, no decision is made regarding the advantageous section. However, when the small winning combination E2 is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated at the left or middle first stop, the middle cherry may be displayed. Therefore, if the middle-tier cherry is displayed when the game is 1400 or more in the inside or from the start of the advantageous section, the player may be misunderstood. , Right first stop is displayed.
However, not limited to this, when the small winning combination E2 is won, since the determination regarding the advantageous section is not made in the first place, the middle-stage cherry may be displayed without operating the above-mentioned instruction function.

In FIG. 1, the effect group number selection means 64 is an effect group number corresponding to the winning condition device, and selects a number to be transmitted to the sub control board 80.
As a result of drawing the condition device, it is also conceivable to transmit the winning prize and the replay condition device number itself to the sub control board 80. However, in the present embodiment, the winning prize and the replay condition device number itself are not transmitted to the sub-control board 80. As a result, the sub-control board 80 side cannot know the winning and replay condition device numbers won in this game.

On the other hand, on the main control board 50 side, the effect group number corresponding to the winning condition device is predetermined. Then, after the lottery of the condition device, the effect group number corresponding to the winning condition device is selected, and the effect group number is transmitted to the sub control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the effect group number selected in the game this time, the sub-control board 80 can select and output the effect corresponding to the effect group number.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an effect group number table.
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21, each condition device is provided with a unique effect group number. For example, the production group number corresponding to the winning of the small winning combination A, the small winning combination B group, and the small winning combination C group is defined as "5". The production group numbers corresponding to the winning of the small winning combination A, the small winning combination B group, and the small winning combination C group may be different, such as "5", "6", and "7", respectively.

Therefore, when the main control board 50 wins the small winning combination A, the small winning combination B group, or the small winning combination C group as a result of the lottery of the condition device, "5" is selected as the effect group number. Then, the information of the selected effect group number "5" is transmitted to the sub control board 80.
When the sub-control board 80 receives the information that the effect group number is "5", it can know that in this game, it has won any of the small winning combination A, the small winning combination B group, and the small winning combination C group. it can. As a result, the winning effect of the bell can be output.

However, even if the sub-control board 80 receives the information that the production group number "5" has been won, or even when the sub-control board 80 has won any of the small winning combination B groups in the game, the correct answer is pushed. You can't know the order. Then, in the present embodiment, the push order instruction number corresponding to the correct push order is transmitted to the sub control board 80 during the advantageous section, but is not transmitted during the normal section or the standby section. Therefore, during the advantageous section, the sub-control board 80 may output the fact that the small winning combination A, the small winning combination B group, or the small winning combination C group has been won and the correct push order corresponding to the push order instruction number as an effect. it can. On the other hand, in the normal section and the standby section, the sub-control board 80 only produces the effect that the small winning combination A, the small winning combination B group, or the small winning combination C group (bell) is won, and the correct answer is pushed in order. Cannot be output as a production.

Further, even if the same push order instruction number is transmitted to the sub control board 80, different effects can be output because the effect group numbers are different. For example, the push order instruction number when the replay B1 is won is "A1" (left first), and the push order instruction number when the small winning combination C1 is won is "A1" (left first). In each case, the same push order instruction number is transmitted to the sub control board 80.

However, when the replay B1 is won, the production group number "2" is transmitted, and when the small winning combination C1 is won, the production group number "5" is transmitted. Therefore, when the production group number "2" is transmitted, it is possible to notify the correct answer pressing order using, for example, the blue color indicating the replay, and when the production group number "5" is transmitted, for example, the bell. It is possible to notify the correct answer pressing order using the yellow color indicating.

In FIG. 1, the reel control means 65 starts the rotation of all (three) reels 31 when the rotation start command of the reels 31 is received, particularly when the start switch 41 is operated in the present embodiment. To control. Further, the reel control means 65 refers to the on / off of the winning flag in the game this time after the lottery of the condition device is performed by the winning combination lottery means 61, and the stop position determination table corresponding to the on / off of the winning flag. Is selected, and when the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined based on the timing when the stop switch 42 is operated, and the motor 32 is driven. It is controlled so that the reel 31 is stopped at the determined position.

For example, in the game in which at least one winning flag is turned on, the reel control means 65 sets a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination (the combination in which the winning flag is turned on) within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. The reel 31 is stopped and controlled so that it can be stopped on the effective line, and the reel 31 is stopped and controlled so that the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination (the winning combination with the winning flag turned off) is not stopped on the effective line. ..

Here, "within the range of stop control of the reel 31" means the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 actually stops, or the amount of rotation of the reel 31 (number of moving frames (designs)). Means within range.
In the present embodiment, the reel 31 is rotated at a speed of about 80 rotations in one minute at a constant speed.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is set within 190 ms. As a result, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of moving frames from the symbol at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is set to 4 frames.

For example, in FIG. 5, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the first "replay" of the left reel 31 is located at the lower left stage (on the effective line), it is four frames ahead, that is, the fifth "bell". Up to "B" is a symbol that can be stopped in the lower left row. Therefore, in the above operation timing, the symbols No. 1 (stopping bitterness) to No. 5 (four-frame sliding) are symbols that can be stopped in the lower left row.

However, not limited to the above, it is also possible to set the maximum number of moving frames to 4 from the next symbol of the symbol located on the effective line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated. In this case, for example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the first "replay" of the left reel 31 is located at the lower left stage, the next symbol, that is, the second "blank" is started. Up to the 6th "replay", which is the symbol 4 frames ahead, is the symbol that can be stopped in the lower left row. Therefore, at the above operation timing, the symbols 2 to 6 are symbols that can be stopped in the lower left row.
In the following description, the maximum number of moving frames from the symbol located on the effective line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated will be described as 4 frames.

First, at the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, when any of the symbols within the range of the stop control of the reel 31 is a symbol to be stopped at a predetermined effective line, when the stop switch 42 is operated. In addition, the symbol is controlled to stop at a predetermined effective line.

That is, if the reel 31 is stopped immediately at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, and the symbol related to the winning combination does not stop at the predetermined effective line, the stop control of the reel 31 is performed until the reel 31 is stopped. By controlling the rotation and movement of the reel 31 within the range of, the design related to the winning combination is controlled to be stopped at a predetermined effective line as much as possible (pull-in stop control).

On the contrary, if the reel 31 is stopped immediately at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, when the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination stops at the effective line, the reel is stopped when the reel 31 is stopped. By controlling the rotation and movement of the reel 31 within the range of the stop control of 31, it is controlled so that the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped on the effective line (kicking stop control).
Further, in the game in which a plurality of winning combinations are won, the priority order of the winning combination is predetermined according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and the operation timing of the stop switch 42, and the winning combination is determined in advance according to the predetermined priority order. Controls the pull-in stop of the symbol with the highest priority.

Further, the reel control means 65 detects the pressing order (operation order) of the stop switch 42. The reel control means 65 detects which of the left, middle, and right stop switches 42 is operated when the stop switch 42 is operated by the player.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, a signal indicating that the stop switch 42 is operated is input to the reel control means 65. By discriminating this signal, the reel control means 65 detects which stop switch 42 has been operated. Then, the stop control of the reel 31 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is executed.

Further, the reel control means 65 includes a stop position determination table for each condition device. The stop position determination table defines the stop position of the reel 31 with respect to the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated. Then, in each stop position determination table, for example, when the stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the first symbol (“replay” in the case of the left reel 31) passes through the lower left stage (on the effective line), what is it? The stop position is predetermined, such as controlling the movement of only the symbol (with how many frames) and stopping the symbol at the lower left.

Here, the symbol arrangement in the present embodiment will be described.
First, as shown in FIG. 5, four "replays" are arranged at intervals of five symbols on all reels 31. As a result, the "replay" of all reels 31 is in the "PB = 1" arrangement.
Similarly, in the left reel 31, four "bell A" or "bell B" are arranged at intervals of five symbols. As a result, the total of these two symbols is "PB = 1".
Further, in the middle reel 31, four "bells C" are arranged at intervals of five symbols. As a result, the "bell C" of the middle reel 31 is arranged at "PB = 1".
Furthermore, in the right reel 31, four "bell A" or "bell B" are arranged at intervals of five symbols. As a result, the total of these two symbols is "PB = 1".

Further, in the right reel 31, four "cherries" are arranged at intervals of five symbols. As a result, the "cherry" on the right reel 31 has a "PB = 1" arrangement.
Further, on the left reel 31, four "black 7" or "watermelon" are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols. As a result, the total of these two symbols is "PB = 1".
Similarly, on the middle reel 31, four "blue 7" or "cherry" are arranged at intervals of five symbols. As a result, the total of these two symbols is "PB = 1".
Similarly, on the right reel 31, four "black 7", "blue 7", "blank", or "red 7" are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols. As a result, the total of these four symbols is "PB = 1".

On the other hand, in the left reel 31, "cherries" are arranged at Nos. 3, 8 and 13, so they are not arranged at "PB = 1".
Similarly, for the "watermelon", the left and middle reels 31 have a "PB ≠ 1" arrangement, and the right reel 31 has a "PB = 1" arrangement.

Hereinafter, the stop position determination table corresponding to each condition device will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 16 described above.
First, the stop position determination table at the time of winning and winning the replay condition device will be described.
The non-winning table is used in a game when a winning combination is not won, and defines a combination of symbols when the reel 31 is stopped so that the combination of symbols corresponding to any winning combination does not stop at the effective line.

The replay A table is used at the time of replay A winning (single winning of replay 01), and the reel is used so that the replay 01 is stopped at the effective line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31 regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42. The stop position of 31 is defined. The symbols of the reels 31 related to the replay 01 and the replays 02 to 06 described later are all the reels 31 in the “PB = 1” arrangement. Therefore, when a replay is won, the winning replay (when a plurality of replays are duplicately won, one of the duplicate winning replays) is always won.

The replay B1 table is used in the game when the replay B1 is won, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, when the left first stop (when the push order is correct), the replay 02 is stopped at the effective line and the left first stop. Other than the time (when the push order is incorrect), the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the replay 01 is stopped at the effective line (see FIG. 13).

First, in a game in which the replay B1 table is used, "Black 7" or "Watermelon" is stopped in the lower left row at the time of the first left stop ("PB = 1" as described above). In this case, "replay" stops at the upper left.
Next, at the time of the second middle stop, the "replay" is stopped in the middle middle stage. Then, at the third stop on the right, "cherry" is stopped in the upper right row. In this case, "replay" stops at the lower right. As a result, "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Replay"-"Cherry" stops on the effective line, and Replay 02 wins. Further, "replay"-"replay"-"replay" is stopped in "upper left stage"-"middle middle stage"-"lower right stage".

On the other hand, in the game in which the replay B1 table is used, "blue 7" or "cherry" is stopped in the middle middle stage at the time of the first middle stop ("PB = 1"). In this case, "replay" stops in the upper middle row. After that, when the left reel 31 is stopped, "black 7" or "watermelon" is stopped in the lower left stage ("PB = 1"). At this time, as described above, "replay" stops at the upper left.
Further, when the right reel 31 is stopped, "replay" is stopped in the upper right row ("PB = 1"). As a result, "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Blue 7 / Cherry"-"Replay" stops on the effective line, and Replay 01 wins. Further, "replay"-"replay"-"replay" is stopped in "upper left"-"middle upper"-"upper right".

In the game in which the replay B1 table is used, the same control is performed at the first right stop as at the first middle stop.
Further, with respect to the replay B2 table when the replay B2 is won and the replay B3 table when the replay B3 is won, the replay 02 is won when the push order is correct and the replay 01 is won when the push order is incorrect by the same control as described above.

The replay C1 table is used in the game when the replay C1 is won, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, when the left first stop (when the push order is correct), the replay 01 is stopped at the effective line and the left first stop. Other than the time (when the push order is incorrect), the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the replay 03 is stopped at the effective line (see FIG. 13).

First, in the game in which the replay C1 table is used, the control of stopping the replay 01 at the effective line at the time of the first left stop is the same as that of the replay B1 table, so the description thereof will be omitted.
Further, in the game in which the replay C1 table is used, the "replay" is stopped in the middle middle stage at the time of the first middle stop ("PB = 1"). After that, when the left reel 31 is stopped, "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped in the lower left stage ("PB = 1"). In this case, "replay" stops in the middle left. When the right reel 31 is stopped, the "watermelon" is stopped in the upper right row ("PB = 1"). In this case, "replay" stops in the middle right. As a result, "Bell A / Bell B"-"Replay"-"Watermelon" stops on the effective line, and the replay 03 is won. Further, "replay"-"replay"-"replay" is stopped at "left middle stage"-"middle middle stage"-"right middle stage".

In the game in which the replay C1 table is used, the same control is performed at the first right stop as at the first middle stop.
Furthermore, for the replay C2 table when the replay C2 is won and the replay C3 table when the replay C3 is won, the replay 01 is won when the push order is correct and the replay 03 is won when the push order is incorrect by the same control as above. ..

The replay D table is used in the game when the replay D is won, and the stop position of the reel 31 is set so as to stop the replay 06 on the effective line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31 regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42. It is a fixed one. Replay 06 is "PB = 1".
Further, the replay E table is used in the game when the replay E is won, and the reel is used so that the replay 04 or 05 is stopped at the effective line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31 regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42. The stop position of 31 is defined. In this case, either Replay 04 or 05 can be stopped at "PB = 1".

The small winning combination A table is used in the game when the small winning combination A is won, and the small winning combination 01 is stopped at the effective line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31 regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42. It defines the stop position. The combination of the symbols of the small winning combination 01 is "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell C"-"replay", and "PB = 1" on all reels 31. When "Black 7 / Watermelon" stops in the lower left row, "Bell A / Bell B" stops in the middle left row. Furthermore, when "Replay" stops in the upper right row, "Bell A / Bell B" stops in the middle right row. Therefore, when the small winning combination 01 is won, "Bell A / Bell B"-"Bell C"-"Bell A / Bell B" stops at "Left middle tier"-"Middle middle tier"-"Right middle tier".

The small winning combination B1 table is used in the game when the small winning combination B1 is won, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, when the left first stop (when the push order is correct), the small winning combination 01 is stopped at the effective line and left. Except for the first stop (when the push order is incorrect), the one-card combination included in the winning combination (when the small combination B1 is won, one of the small combination 03, 10, 11, 18, 19, or 26) The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so as to stop at the effective line or stop any of the pattern symbols 01 to 03.

In the game in which the small winning combination B1 table is used, the left first stop (when the push order is correct) is the same as that of the small winning combination A table, so the explanation is omitted.
Even when the following small winning combination B2 table to small winning combination B12 table are used, the same stop control as the small winning combination A table is performed when the push order is correct.
As a result, when the small winning combination A is won and when the small winning combination B is won, the small winning combination 01 always wins, and the "left middle tier"-"middle middle tier"-"right middle tier" is displayed. "Bell A / Bell B"-"Bell C"-"Bell A / Bell B" stops. Therefore, even if the small winning combination 01 wins in a game in which the instruction function is not activated, the player does not know whether the small winning combination A is won or the push order is correct when the small winning combination B group is won.

Further, even during the advantageous section, when the small winning combination A is won, if the instruction function is activated by the dummy as described above, the player can determine whether the small winning combination A is won or the small winning combination B group is won. I don't know.
As described above, in the present embodiment, since there is a setting difference in the number of winnings of the small winning combination A, it is possible to estimate the set value by counting the number of winnings of the small winning combination A. However, if the stop rolls are the same when the small role A is won and when the push order is correct when the small role B group is won, it is not possible to count only the number of winnings of the small role A, so the set value. Can no longer be guessed.

Further, more specifically, in the game in which the small winning combination B1 table is used, the following stop control is executed.
First, when the small winning combination B1 is won, as shown in FIG. 14, seven small winning combinations 01, 03, 10, 11, 18, 19, and 26 are won, and the combinations of the symbols are as follows.
Small role 01: "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell C"-"Replay" (9 sheets)
Small role 03: "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small role 10: "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small role 11: "Bell C"-"Bell A"-"Blue 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 18: "Red 7"-"Bell B"-"Red 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 19: "Bell C"-"Blue 7"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small role 26: "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)

Then, the following method can be mentioned as stop control of the reel 31 when a plurality of small winning combinations having different payout numbers are elected in duplicate.
As a first priority, when all the symbols (of the reel 31) constituting the winning combination of symbols can be stopped on the effective line, the reel 31 is stopped at that position.

Next, when it is not possible to "stop all the symbols that make up the winning combination of symbols on the effective line" (when the first priority cannot be adopted), the second priority is "number of sheets priority". "Or" quantity priority "is used to stop and control the reel 31.
Here, "number of sheets priority" means that among the combinations of symbols that have been won in duplicate, the symbols of the reel 31 that constitutes the combination of the symbols with the largest number of payouts are preferentially stopped (pulled in) to the effective line. To say. Therefore, when the small winning combination B group is won, the small winning combination 01 corresponds to the combination of the symbols with the largest number of payouts (9).
On the other hand, "number priority" means that the symbols of the reel 31 are stopped at the effective line so that the number of combinations of symbols that can be stopped at the effective line is the largest.

For example, when the small winning combination B1 is won and the middle first stop is made, all the middle reels 31 related to the winning winning combination cannot be stopped at the effective line at the same time. This is because there are a plurality of types of symbols of the winning small winning medium reel 31, whereas there is only one effective line, so only one type of symbol can be stopped at the effective line.

Therefore, when the small winning combination B group is won, the reel 31 is stopped and controlled by either the number priority or the number priority. In the present embodiment, when the push order is correct, the reels are stopped and controlled by giving priority to the number of sheets, and when the push order is incorrect, the reels 31 are stopped and controlled by giving priority to the number of sheets. When the reels are stopped and controlled by giving priority to the number of reels, the small winning combination 01 (9-card winning combination) is configured so that one winning combination can be won without winning (so that it may be missed).
In this way, the operation mode of the stop switch 42 is such that the number of sheets is prioritized in a specific pressing order (correct answer pressing order in the present embodiment), and the number is prioritized in another pressing order (incorrect answer pressing order in the present embodiment). The number of sheets or the number of sheets is prioritized according to the above.

In the above example, when the number is prioritized at the time of the middle first stop (when the push order is incorrect), if either "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the effective line, the number is stopped at the effective line. The maximum number of combinations of symbols that can be made is two each. For example, if "Bell A" is stopped at the effective line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, the small winning combination 03 or 11 can be won. Since the "bell A" or "bell B" of the middle reel 31 is "PB = 1" in total of the two symbols, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, either "bell A" or "bell B" is always stopped. Can be made to.
Here, it is assumed that the "bell A" is stopped when the middle reel 31 is stopped. In this case, at this point, the small winning combination 03 or 11 can be won.

Next, when stopping the left reel 31, priority is given to stopping "bell A" or "bell C" at the effective line. As shown in FIG. 5, in the left reel 31, "bell A" is arranged at Nos. 15 and 0, and "Bell C" is arranged at Nos. 18. Therefore, when the symbols of the left reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated are the 11th to the 19th and the 0th, the "bell A" or the "bell C" can be stopped at the effective line. When the numbers are 1 to 10, "Bell A" or "Bell C" cannot be stopped at the effective line.

Therefore, when the left reel 31 is stopped at random (without aiming at a specific symbol), "Bell A" or "Bell C" is stopped at the effective line with a probability of "1/2". In particular, in the present embodiment, since the "bell A" can be stopped without stopping the "bell C", the symbols of the left reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated are the 11th to 19th and the 0th. When is, "Bell A" is always stopped at the effective line.
In this way, stopping "Bell A" without stopping "Bell C" makes it possible to display the pattern symbol described later when the winning combination is missed at the time of the third stop. This is because the pattern symbol cannot be displayed if "Bell C" is stopped when the left reel 31 is stopped).

On the other hand, when the "bell A" cannot be stopped at the effective line when the left reel 31 is stopped, control is performed so that one of the pattern symbols is stopped at the effective line. As shown in FIG. 12, among the pattern symbols in which the symbol of the middle reel 31 is "bell A", the symbol of the left reel 31 is "black 7" or "watermelon". Since the "black 7" or "watermelon" on the left reel 31 is "PB = 1" in the sum of the two symbols, any one of these symbols can be stopped at any time.

Therefore, at the time of the middle first stop and the left second stop, it becomes "bell A"-"bell A"-"rotating", or "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell A"-"rotating". ..
Further, when "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Rotating" is set before the third right stop, "Bell A" can be stopped on the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped. Stop "Bell A". As shown in FIG. 5, in order to stop "Bell A" at the effective line, "Bell A" is stopped if the design of the effective line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated is in the range of 4 to 13. It can be made to stop, and "Bell A" cannot be stopped in other ranges. Therefore, when the right reel 31 is stopped at random, the "bell A" is stopped at the effective line with a probability of "1/2". When "Bell A" is stopped on the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped, "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell A" is obtained, and the small winning combination 03 is won.

On the other hand, in the case of "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Rotating", if "Bell A" cannot be stopped on the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped, "Cherry" is set as the effective line. Stop ("PB = 1"). As a result, the combination of symbols on the effective line becomes "bell A"-"bell A"-"cherry", and the pattern symbol 03 stops.
Further, in the case of "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell A"-"rotating", when the right reel 31 is stopped, "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped on the effective line ("PB = 1"). ). As a result, the combination of symbols on the effective line becomes "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell A"-"bell A / bell B", and the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

Next, it is assumed that "Bell B" is stopped on the effective line at the time of the first stop (when the push order is incorrect) when the small winning combination B1 is won. In this case, at this point, the small winning combination 10 or 18 can be won.
Next, when stopping the left reel 31, priority is given to stopping the symbol "bell B" or "red 7" related to the small winning combination 10 or 18 at the effective line. As shown in FIG. 5, in the left reel 31, "Bell B" is arranged at Nos. 5 and 10, and "Red 7" is arranged at Nos. 7. Therefore, when the design of the left reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated is No. 1 to No. 10, "Bell B" or "Red 7" can be stopped at the effective line, and other than that. At some times, "Bell B" or "Red 7" cannot be stopped at the effective line.

Therefore, when the left reel 31 is stopped at random (without aiming at a specific symbol), there is a probability of "1/2" that "Bell B" or "Red 7" stops at the effective line. In particular, in the present embodiment, since "Bell B" can be stopped without stopping "Red 7", when the symbol of the left reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated is No. 1 to No. 10. Always stops "Bell B" on the effective line.

On the other hand, when the "bell B" cannot be stopped at the effective line when the left reel 31 is stopped, control is performed so that one of the pattern symbols is stopped at the effective line. As shown in FIG. 12, the pattern symbol in which the symbol of the middle reel 31 is "bell B" is "black 7" or "watermelon". Since the "black 7" or "watermelon" on the left reel 31 is "PB = 1" in the sum of the two symbols, any one of these symbols can be stopped at any time.

Therefore, at the time of the middle first stop and the left second stop, it becomes "bell B"-"bell B"-"rotating", or "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell B"-"rotating". ..
Further, when "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Rotating" is set before the third right stop, "Bell B" can be stopped on the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped. Stop "Bell B". As shown in FIG. 5, in order to stop "Bell B" at the effective line, the design of the effective line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated should be in the range of 14 to 18 or 19 to 3. For example, "Bell B" can be stopped, and "Bell B" cannot be stopped in other ranges. Therefore, when the right reel 31 is stopped at random, the "bell B" is stopped at the effective line with a probability of "1/2". When "Bell B" is stopped on the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped, "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" is obtained, and the small winning combination 10 is won.

On the other hand, in the case of "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Rotating", if "Bell B" cannot be stopped on the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped, "Cherry" is set as the effective line. Stop ("PB = 1"). As a result, the combination of symbols on the effective line becomes "bell B"-"bell B"-"cherry", and the pattern symbol 03 stops.
Further, in the case of "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell B"-"rotating", when the right reel 31 is stopped, "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped on the effective line ("PB = 1"). ). As a result, the combination of symbols on the effective line becomes "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell B"-"bell A / bell B", and the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

From the above, at the time of the first stop at the time of winning the small winning combination B1, the middle reel 31 can stop the symbol related to the one-card combination at "PB = 1", and the left and right reels 31 are both "1". With a probability of "/ 2", the symbol related to the 1-card combination can be stopped. Further, when the symbol related to the single card combination cannot be stopped, the pattern symbol can be stopped at any time. Therefore, at the time of the first stop at the time of winning the small role B1 (when the push order is incorrect),
1-card combination: 1/4 chance of winning Pattern pattern: 3/4 chance of stopping.
Furthermore, when winning a single role,
"Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell A" (small role 03)
"Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" (small role 10)
Will be one of.

Next, the case where the small winning combination B1 is won and the right first stop is described will be described. When giving priority to the number when the right reel 31 is stopped, if either "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the effective line, the number of combinations of symbols that can be stopped at the effective line is two each. Becomes the maximum. For example, if "Bell A" is stopped at the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped, the small winning combination 03 or 19 can be won. Since the "bell A" or "bell B" of the right reel 31 is "PB = 1" in the sum of the two symbols, the "bell A" or "bell B" can always be stopped when the right reel 31 is stopped. it can.
First, it is assumed that "Bell A" is stopped on the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped. In this case, at this point, the small winning combination 03 or 19 can be won.

Next, when stopping the left reel 31, priority is given to stopping the symbol "bell A" or "bell C" related to the small winning combination 03 or 19 at the effective line. Here, as in the above, priority is given to stopping "Bell A". "Bell A" can be stopped with a probability of "1/2". If "Bell A" cannot be stopped, "Black 7" or "Watermelon" is stopped ("PB = 1" in total of 2 symbols).

Therefore, at the time of the first right stop and the second left stop, it is either "Bell A"-"Rotating"-"Bell A", or "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Rotating"-"Bell A". ..
Further, in the case where "Bell A"-"Rotating"-"Bell A" is set before the middle third stop, when "Bell A" can be stopped on the effective line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "Bell A" can be stopped. Stop "Bell A". As shown in FIG. 5, in order to stop "Bell A" at the effective line, "Bell A" is stopped if the design of the effective line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated is in the range of 5 to 14. It can be made to stop, and "Bell A" cannot be stopped in other ranges. Therefore, when the middle reel 31 is stopped at random, the "bell A" is stopped at the effective line with a probability of "1/2". When "Bell A" is stopped on the effective line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell A" is obtained, and the small winning combination 03 is won.

On the other hand, in the case of "Bell A"-"Rotating"-"Bell A", if "Bell A" cannot be stopped on the effective line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "Blue 7" or "Cherry" Is stopped at the effective line (“PB = 1” in the total of 2 symbols). As a result, the pattern symbol 02 stops at the effective line.
Further, in the case of "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell A", when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped on the effective line ("PB = 1"). ). As a result, the pattern symbol 01 stops at the effective line.

Further, it is assumed that "Bell B" is stopped at the effective line at the first stop of the right reel 31. In this case, at this point, the small winning combination 10 or 26 can be won.
Next, when stopping the left reel 31, priority is given to stopping the symbol "bell B" or "red 7" related to the small winning combination 10 or 26 on the effective line. Here, priority is given to stopping "Bell B". "Bell B" can be stopped with a probability of "1/2". If "Bell B" cannot be stopped, "Black 7" or "Watermelon" is stopped ("PB = 1" in total of 2 symbols).

Therefore, at the time of the first right stop and the second left stop, it is either "bell B"-"rotating"-"bell B" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell B". ..
Further, when "Bell B"-"Rotating"-"Bell B" is set before the middle third stop, when "Bell B" can be stopped on the effective line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "Bell B" can be stopped. Stop "Bell B". Here, when the middle reel 31 is stopped at random, the "bell B" is stopped at the effective line with a probability of "1/2". When "Bell B" is stopped on the effective line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" is obtained, and the small winning combination 10 is won.

On the other hand, in the case of "Bell B"-"Rotating"-"Bell B", if "Bell B" cannot be stopped on the effective line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "Blue 7" or "Cherry" Is stopped at the effective line (“PB = 1” in the sum of the two symbols). As a result, the pattern symbol 02 stops at the effective line.
Further, in the case of "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell B", when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped on the effective line ("PB = 1"). ). As a result, the pattern symbol 01 stops at the effective line.

From the above, at the time of the first right stop when the small winning combination B1 is won, the right reel 31 can stop the symbol related to the one-card combination at "PB = 1", and both the left and right reels 31 have "1". With a probability of "/ 2", the symbol related to the 1-card combination can be stopped. Further, when the symbol related to the single card combination cannot be stopped, the pattern symbol can be stopped at any time. Therefore, at the time of the first stop on the right when the small role B1 is won (when the push order is incorrect),
1-card combination: 1/4 chance of winning Pattern pattern: 3/4 chance of stopping.
Furthermore, when winning a single role,
"Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell A" (small role 03)
"Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" (small role 10)
Will be one of.
The winning rate and the stop rate of the pattern symbol are the same as those at the time of the first stop.
Therefore, when the small winning combination B1 is won, when the left first stop (when the push order is correct), the small winning combination 01 wins with "PB = 1". On the other hand, at the time of the first stop in the middle or right (when the push order is incorrect), one card wins with a probability of "1/4", and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of "3/4". ..

When the small winning combination B2 is won, the small winning combination B2 table is provided as in the case where the small winning combination B1 is won. The winning roles included when winning the small role B2 are
Small role 01: "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell C"-"Replay" (9 sheets)
Small role 04: "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small role 09: "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small role 12: "Bell C"-"Bell A"-"Red 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 17: "Red 7"-"Bell B"-"Blue 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 20: "Bell C"-"Blue 7"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small role 25: "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Is.

Then, at the time of the first left stop (when the push order is correct), the small winning combination 01 is awarded.
Next, at the time of the first middle stop (when the push order is incorrect), "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the effective line by giving priority to the number.
First, when "Bell A" is stopped at the first middle stop, priority is given to stopping either "Bell A" or "Bell C" at the time of left stop. Here, when the "bell C" can be stopped, the "bell A" can be stopped, so the "bell A" is stopped without stopping the "bell C". If "Bell A" cannot be stopped, "Black 7 / Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it is either "bell A"-"bell A"-"rotating" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell A"-"rotating".

When "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Rotating", "Bell B" is stopped when the right stop is possible, and "Bell B" is stopped when the right stop is possible. As a result, the small role 04 is won. If "Bell B" cannot be stopped when stopped to the right, "Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 03 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell A"-"Rotating" is set, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the time of right stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

Next, it is assumed that "Bell B" is stopped at the time of the first middle stop. In this case, when stopping to the left, priority is given to stopping either "Bell B" or "Red 7". Here, since "Bell B" can be stopped when "Red 7" can be stopped, "Bell B" is stopped without stopping "Red 7". If "Bell B" cannot be stopped, "Black 7 / Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it is either "bell B"-"bell B"-"rotating" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell B"-"rotating".

When "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Rotating", "Bell A" is stopped when the right stop is possible, and "Bell A" is stopped when the right stop is possible. As a result, the small role 09 will be won. If "Bell A" cannot be stopped when stopped to the right, "Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 03 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell B"-"Rotating" is set, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the time of right stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

Next, at the time of the first right stop when the small winning combination B2 is won (when the push order is incorrect), "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the effective line by giving priority to the number.
First, when "Bell A" is stopped at the first right stop, priority is given to stopping either "Bell B" or "Red 7" at the time of left stop. Here, since "Bell B" can be stopped when "Red 7" can be stopped, "Bell B" is stopped without stopping "Red 7". If "Bell B" cannot be stopped, "Black 7 / Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it is either "Bell B"-"Rotating"-"Bell A" or "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Rotating"-"Bell A".

When "Bell B"-"Rotating"-"Bell A", "Bell B" is stopped when "Bell B" can be stopped at the middle stop. As a result, the small role 09 will be won. If "Bell B" cannot be stopped during the middle stop, "Blue 7 / Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 02 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Rotating"-"Bell A" is reached, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the time of medium stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

Next, it is assumed that "Bell B" is stopped at the first right stop. In this case, when stopping to the left, priority is given to stopping either "Bell A" or "Bell C". Here, when the "bell C" can be stopped, the "bell A" can be stopped, so the "bell A" is stopped without stopping the "bell C". If "Bell A" cannot be stopped, "Black 7 / Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it is either "Bell A"-"Rotating"-"Bell B" or "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Rotating"-"Bell B".

When "Bell A"-"Rotating"-"Bell B", "Bell A" is stopped when "Bell A" can be stopped at the middle stop. As a result, the small role 04 is won. If "Bell A" cannot be stopped during the middle stop, "Blue 7 / Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 02 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Rotating"-"Bell B" is displayed, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the middle stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

From the above, when the small role B2 is won, when the push order is incorrect,
1-card combination: 1/4 chance of winning Pattern pattern: 3/4 chance of stopping.
Furthermore, when winning a single role,
"Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell B" (small role 04)
"Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell A" (small role 09)
Will be one of.

When the small winning combination B3 is won, the small winning combination B3 table is provided as in the case where the small winning combination B1 is won. The winning roles included when the small role B3 is won are
Small role 01: "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell C"-"Replay" (9 sheets)
Small role 05: "Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small role 08: "Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small role 13: "Bell C"-"Bell B"-"Blue 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 16: "Red 7"-"Bell A"-"Red 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 21: "Bell C"-"Red 7"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small role 24: "Red 7"-"Blue 7"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Is.

Then, at the time of the first left stop (when the push order is correct), the small winning combination 01 is awarded.
Next, at the time of the first middle stop (when the push order is incorrect), "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the effective line by giving priority to the number.
First, when "Bell A" is stopped at the first middle stop, priority is given to stopping either "Bell B" or "Red 7" at the time of left stop. Here, in the same manner as above, "Bell B" is stopped without stopping "Red 7". If "Bell B" cannot be stopped, "Black 7 / Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it is either "bell B"-"bell A"-"rotating" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell A"-"rotating".

When "Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Rotating", "Bell B" is stopped when "Bell B" can be stopped when stopped to the right. As a result, the small role 08 will be won. If "Bell B" cannot be stopped when stopped to the right, "Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 03 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell A"-"Rotating" is set, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the time of right stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

Next, it is assumed that "Bell B" is stopped at the time of the first middle stop. In this case, when stopping to the left, priority is given to stopping either "Bell A" or "Bell C". Here, in the same manner as described above, the "bell A" is stopped without stopping the "bell C". If "Bell A" cannot be stopped, "Black 7 / Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it is either "bell A"-"bell B"-"rotating" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell B"-"rotating".

When "Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Rotating", "Bell A" is stopped when it is possible to stop "Bell A" when it is stopped to the right. As a result, the small role 05 will be awarded. If "Bell A" cannot be stopped when stopped to the right, "Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 03 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell B"-"Rotating" is set, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the time of right stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

Next, at the time of the first right stop when the small winning combination B2 is won (when the push order is incorrect), "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the effective line by giving priority to the number.
First, when "Bell A" is stopped at the first right stop, priority is given to stopping either "Bell A" or "Bell C" at the time of left stop. Here, the "bell A" is stopped in the same manner as described above. If "Bell A" cannot be stopped, "Black 7 / Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it is either "Bell A"-"Rotating"-"Bell A" or "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Rotating"-"Bell A".

When "Bell A"-"Rotating"-"Bell A", "Bell B" is stopped when "Bell B" can be stopped at the middle stop. As a result, the small role 05 will be awarded. If "Bell B" cannot be stopped during the middle stop, "Blue 7 / Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 02 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Rotating"-"Bell A" is reached, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the time of medium stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

Next, it is assumed that "Bell B" is stopped at the first right stop. In this case, when stopping to the left, priority is given to stopping either "Bell B" or "Red 7". Here, the "bell B" is stopped in the same manner as described above. If "Bell B" cannot be stopped, "Black 7 / Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it is either "Bell B"-"Rotating"-"Bell B" or "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Rotating"-"Bell B".

When "Bell B"-"Rotating"-"Bell B", "Bell A" is stopped when "Bell A" can be stopped at the middle stop. As a result, the small role 08 will be won. If "Bell B" cannot be stopped during the middle stop, "Blue 7 / Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 02 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Rotating"-"Bell B" is displayed, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the middle stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

From the above, when the small role B3 is won, when the push order is incorrect,
1-card combination: 1/4 chance of winning Pattern pattern: 3/4 chance of stopping.
Furthermore, when winning a single role,
"Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Bell A" (small role 05)
"Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Bell B" (small role 08)
Will be one of.

When the small winning combination B4 is won, the small winning combination B4 table is provided as in the case where the small winning combination B1 is won. The winning roles included when the small role B4 is won are
Small role 01: "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell C"-"Replay" (9 sheets)
Small role 06: "Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small role 07: "Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small role 14: "Bell C"-"Bell B"-"Red 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 15: "Red 7"-"Bell A"-"Blue 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 22: "Bell C"-"Red 7"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small role 23: "Red 7"-"Blue 7"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Is.

Then, at the time of the first left stop (when the push order is correct), the small winning combination 01 is awarded.
Next, at the time of the first middle stop (when the push order is incorrect), "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the effective line by giving priority to the number.
First, when "Bell A" is stopped at the middle first stop, priority is given to stopping either "Bell B" or "Red 7" at the time of left stop, but here, the same as above. Stop "Bell B". If "Bell B" cannot be stopped, "Black 7 / Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it is either "bell B"-"bell A"-"rotating" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell A"-"rotating".

When "Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Rotating", "Bell A" is stopped when the right stop is possible, and "Bell A" is stopped when the right stop is possible. As a result, the small role 07 will be won. If "Bell B" cannot be stopped when stopped to the right, "Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 03 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell A"-"Rotating" is set, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the time of right stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

Next, it is assumed that "Bell B" is stopped at the time of the first middle stop. In this case, when stopping to the left, priority is given to stopping either "Bell A" or "Bell C". Here, the "bell A" is stopped in the same manner as above. If "Bell A" cannot be stopped, "Black 7 / Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it is either "bell A"-"bell B"-"rotating" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell B"-"rotating".

When "Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Rotating", "Bell B" is stopped when it is possible to stop "Bell B" when it is stopped to the right. As a result, the small role 06 will be won. If "Bell B" cannot be stopped when stopped to the right, "Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 03 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell B"-"Rotating" is set, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the time of right stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

Next, at the time of the first right stop when the small winning combination B4 is won (when the push order is incorrect), "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the effective line by giving priority to the number.
First, when "Bell A" is stopped at the first right stop, priority is given to stopping either "Bell B" or "Red 7" at the time of left stop. Here, the "bell B" is stopped in the same manner as described above. If "Bell B" cannot be stopped, "Black 7 / Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it is either "Bell B"-"Rotating"-"Bell A" or "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Rotating"-"Bell A".

When "Bell B"-"Rotating"-"Bell A", "Bell A" is stopped when "Bell A" can be stopped at the middle stop. As a result, the small role 07 will be won. If "Bell A" cannot be stopped during the middle stop, "Blue 7 / Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 02 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Rotating"-"Bell A" is reached, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the time of medium stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

Next, it is assumed that "Bell B" is stopped at the first right stop. In this case, when stopping to the left, priority is given to stopping either "Bell A" or "Bell C". Here, the "bell A" is stopped in the same manner as above. If "Bell A" cannot be stopped, "Black 7 / Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it is either "Bell A"-"Rotating"-"Bell B" or "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Rotating"-"Bell B".

When "Bell A"-"Rotating"-"Bell B", "Bell B" is stopped when "Bell B" can be stopped at the middle stop. As a result, the small role 06 will be won. If "Bell B" cannot be stopped during the middle stop, "Blue 7 / Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 02 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Rotating"-"Bell B" is displayed, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the middle stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

From the above, when the small role B4 is won, when the push order is incorrect,
1-card combination: 1/4 chance of winning Pattern pattern: 3/4 chance of stopping.
Furthermore, when winning a single role,
"Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" (small role 06)
"Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Bell A" (small role 07)
Will be one of.

Hereinafter, detailed description of each of the small winning combination B5 table to the small winning combination B12 table at the time of winning the small winning combination B5 to B12 will be omitted, and only the outline thereof will be described.
In the small winning combination B5 table used when the small winning combination B5 is won, the small winning combination 01 wins at the middle first stop, which is the correct answer in the pushing order, and the small winning combination 03 or small winning combination has a probability of "1/4" when the pushing order is incorrect. The winning combination 10 wins, and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as when the small winning combination B1 is won.
In addition, in the small winning combination B6 table used when the small winning combination B6 is won, the small winning combination 01 wins at the first stop in the middle when the pushing order is correct, and the small winning combination 04 has a probability of "1/4" when the pushing order is incorrect. Alternatively, the small winning combination 09 wins, and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as when the small winning combination B2 is won.

Furthermore, in the small winning combination B7 table used when the small winning combination B7 is won, the small winning combination 01 wins at the first stop in the middle when the push order is correct, and there is a probability of "1/4" when the push order is incorrect. 05 or small winning combination 08 wins, and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as when the small winning combination B3 is won.
Furthermore, in the small winning combination B8 table used when the small winning combination B8 is won, the small winning combination 01 wins at the first stop in the middle when the pushing order is correct, and the small winning combination 06 has a probability of "1/4" when the pushing order is incorrect. Alternatively, the small winning combination 07 wins, and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as when the small winning combination B4 is won.

In the small winning combination B9 table used when the small winning combination B9 is won, the small winning combination 01 wins when the right first stop is the correct answer in the pushing order, and the small winning combination 03 or small winning combination has a probability of "1/4" when the pushing order is incorrect. The winning combination 10 wins, and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as when the small winning combination B1 is won.
Further, in the small winning combination B10 table used when the small winning combination B10 is won, the small winning combination 01 wins at the first right stop when the pushing order is correct, and the small winning combination 04 has a probability of "1/4" when the pushing order is incorrect. Alternatively, the small winning combination 09 wins, and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as when the small winning combination B2 is won.

Furthermore, in the small winning combination B11 table used when the small winning combination B11 is won, the small winning combination 01 wins when the right first stop is the correct answer in the pushing order, and the small winning combination has a probability of "1/4" when the pushing order is incorrect. 05 or small winning combination 08 wins, and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as when the small winning combination B3 is won.
Furthermore, in the small winning combination B12 table used when the small winning combination B12 is won, the small winning combination 01 wins at the first right stop, which is the correct answer in the push order, and the small win 06 has a probability of "1/4" when the push order is incorrect. Alternatively, the small winning combination 07 wins, and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as when the small winning combination B4 is won.

As is clear from the above, the one-card winning combination that can be won when the push order is incorrect at the time of winning the small winning combination B group is the small winning combination 03 to the small winning combination 10. Therefore, small wins other than the above included in each condition device will not win. The setting in this way is related to the one-card combination that can be won when the small combination C group, which will be described later, is won.

The small winning combination C1 table is used in the game when the small winning combination C1 is won, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, when the left first stop (when the push order is correct), the small winning combination 02 is stopped at the effective line and left. Except for the first stop (when the push order is incorrect), the one-card combination included in the winning combination (when the small combination C1 is won, any of the small combination 03 to 10) is stopped at the effective line. The stop position of the reel 31 is defined.

Small win C1 (same for small wins C2 and C3, which will be described later) When the push order is correct, the small win 02 (3 wins) will be won by prioritizing the number of coins, as in the case of winning the small win B group. Control. As shown in FIG. 7, the combination of symbols corresponding to the small winning combination 02 is "bell A / bell B"-"blue 7 / cherry"-"watermelon", and "PB = 1" on all reels 31. .. Therefore, when the push order is correct, the small winning combination 02 can always be won.

In addition, when the small winning combination C1 is won, when the pushing order is incorrect (at the time of the first stop in the middle or the right), the number of winning winning combination (small winning combination 03 to 10) is controlled by giving priority to the number of pieces. Here, as shown in FIG. 8, the combination of the symbols of the small combinations 03 to 10 is a combination of the symbols of "bell A" or "bell B" for each reel 31. Further, among the combinations of the symbols of the small winning combinations 03 to 10, there are four "bell A" and four "bell B" in each reel 31, and either "bell A" or "bell B" can be used. Even if it is stopped, the condition of quantity priority is satisfied. In particular, when the small winning combination C2 and the small winning combination C3 are won, the small winning combination 21 and the small winning combination 22 are included, respectively, but even if these small winning combinations are included in the winning combination, the type of the symbol that gives priority to the number does not change. Further, in all reels 31, "bell A" or "bell B" is "PB = 1" in total of the two symbols. Therefore, any one of the small winning combinations 03 to 10 can always be won.

From the above, when the small winning combination C1 is won, the small winning combination 02 (3 cards) wins when the pushing order is correct (“PB = 1”), and when the pushing order is incorrect, either small winning combination 03 to 10 (1) The winning combination (“PB = 1”) does not occur (stopping the pattern pattern) as in the case of winning the small combination B group.

The small winning combination C2 table and the small winning combination C3 table used at the time of winning the small winning combination C2 and the small winning combination C3 are the same as those of the small winning combination C1 table. As shown in FIG. 16, when the small winning combination C2 is won, the middle first stop is in the correct answer pushing order, and when the small winning combination C3 is won, the right first stop is in the correct answer pushing order. The stop control for winning the small winning combination 02 or the small winning combination 03 to 10 is the same as when the small winning combination C1 is won, so the explanation is omitted.

Therefore, one card combination (small combination 03 to 10) that can be stopped when the push order is incorrect when the small combination B group is won, and one card combination (small combination 03 to 10) that can be stopped when the push order is incorrect when the small combination C group is won. Small roles 03 to 10) are the same. As a result, it is not possible to determine whether the small winning combination B group or the small winning combination C group has been won in the game just by looking at the winning of the small winning combination 03-10.

The small winning combination D table is used in the game when the small winning combination D is won, and the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so as to stop the small winning combination 35 on the effective line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. In the small winning combination D table, the pressing order of the stop switch 42 does not matter. As shown in FIG. 9, the combination of the symbols of the small winning combination 35 is a set of "watermelons". The "watermelon" is arranged "PB ≠ 1" on the left and middle reels 31 and "PB = 1" on the right reel 31. Therefore, in the game in which the small winning combination D table is used, in the left and middle reels 31, if the stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the "watermelon" stops at the effective line, the "watermelon" stops at the effective line. When the stop switch 42 is operated at a timing when the "watermelon" does not stop at the effective line, the "watermelon" does not stop at the effective line and the small winning combination 35 is missed.

The small winning combination E1 table is used in the game when the small winning combination E1 is won, and the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so as to stop the small winning combination 36 or 38 on the effective line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. Is. Here, as shown in FIG. 16, when the stop switch 42 is operated at the left or middle first stop, it becomes a so-called middle-stage cherry stop type (so that the "cherry" stops at the left middle stage). The stop position of the reel 31 is determined. On the other hand, when the stop switch 42 is operated at the first right stop, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the middle cherry does not stop.

It should be noted that the winning of the small winning combination E1 includes the small winning combination 36 and 38 (furthermore, when the small winning combination E2 is won, the small winning combination 37 is included), but since each of these small winning combinations is a two-card combination, the above-mentioned The number / number priority is not applied, and the reel 31 can be stopped by an arbitrary stop control determined in advance. Therefore, it is controlled to give priority to the winning of the small winning combination 36 at the time of the left or middle first stop, and to give priority to the winning of the small winning combination 38 at the time of the right first stop.

In FIG. 5, the “cherries” on the left reel 31 are Nos. 3, 8, and 13 (“PB ≠ 1”). Then, when "cherry" is stopped in the middle left row, "blank" or "red 7" is stopped in the effective line in the lower left row. Therefore, in this case, the symbol related to the small winning combination 36 is stopped for the left reel 31.

For example, when the 7th "Red 7" is stopped in the lower left row at the first left stop ("Cherry" is stopped in the middle left row), "Blue 7" or "Cherry" is valid when the middle reel 31 is stopped. Stop at the line ("PB = 1"), and when the right reel 31 is stopped, either "Black 7", "Blue 7", "Red 7", or "Blank" (4 symbols total "PB =" 1 ”) is stopped at the effective line. As a result, the small role 36 is won.
Further, when the 2nd or 12th "blank" is stopped in the lower left stage when the left reel 31 is stopped ("cherry" is stopped in the middle left stage), the same as above, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "" Stop "Blue 7" or "Cherry" at the effective line, and when the right reel 31 is stopped, stop either "Black 7", "Blue 7", "Red 7", or "Blank" at the effective line. .. As a result, the small role 36 is won.

Stop control is also performed at the time of the first middle stop in the same manner as described above. Therefore, the middle and right reels 31 have a case where the symbol related to the small winning combination 36 stops at "PB = 1", and the left reel 31 has a case where "red 7" or "blank" stops and a case where it does not stop (for the left reel 31). "PB ≠ 1").
However, if "Red 7" or "Blank" cannot be stopped in the lower left row at the time of the left or middle first stop, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped. "Bell A" or "Bell B" can be stopped at "PB = 1". In this case, the stop type is "Bell A / Bell B"-"Blue 7 / Cherry"-"Black 7 / Blue 7 / Red 7 / Blank", and the small winning combination 38 wins.

On the other hand, in the game in which the small winning combination E1 table is used, the winning of the small winning combination 38 is prioritized when the right first stop is made. Therefore, in this case, "Bell A / Bell B"-"Blue 7 / Cherry"-"Black 7 / Blue 7 / Red 7 / Blank" stops, and the small winning combination 38 wins with "PB = 1". ..
Further, at the time of the first right stop, even if the "cherry" can be stopped at the left middle stage when the left reel 31 is stopped, the "cherry" is not stopped at the left middle stage, and the "bell A" or "bell" at the lower left stage. Stop "B" (in this case, "cherry" is not stopped in the middle left).

The small winning combination E2 table is used in the game when the small winning combination E1 is won, and the reel 31 is used to stop the small winning combination 36 or 38 (or the small winning combination 37) on the effective line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. It defines the stop position of.
Therefore, since the small winning combination E2 table can perform the same stop control as the small winning combination E1 table, it is possible to use the same stop position determination table.

Alternatively, in the case of the first left stop, only when "Red 7" or "Blank" can be stopped in the lower left row (when the middle row cherry is stopped), "Replay" is set to the effective line for the middle reel 31. It may be stopped (“PB = 1”), and any one of “black 7”, “blue 7”, “red 7”, or “blank” may be stopped for the right reel 31. As a result, the small role 37 wins a prize. If the stop control is performed in this way, it is possible to determine whether the small winning combination E1 is won or the small winning combination E2 is won when the middle cherry is stopped.

The small winning combination F table is used in the game when the small winning combination F is won, and the stop position of the reel 31 is set so as to stop any of the small winning combination 01 to 39 on the effective line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. It is a fixed one.
In the present embodiment, the small winning combination F is drawn only during 1BB operation.
Further, the small winning combination F table performs stop control by giving priority to the number of sheets regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42. As a result, the small role 39 is always won. In the left reel 31, "PB = 1" is arranged by adding up the two symbols of "cherry" or "bell C", so the small winning combination 39 wins with "PB = 1".

The small winning combination G table is used in the game when the small winning combination G is won, and the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so as to stop the small winning combination 40 on the effective line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. .. Since the small winning combination 40 is composed of a combination of symbols arranged with "PB = 1" for all reels 31, the small winning combination 40 can always be won in the game.

The 1BBA table is used when the game when the accessory condition device number "1" is won (1BBA alone is won), or when the 1BBA is won before the previous game and is not won in the game this time, and the stop control of the reel 31 is used. Within the range of, the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BBA is stopped at the effective line, and the combination of symbols corresponding to the combinations other than 1BBA is determined so as not to stop at the effective line. It is a thing.
Since the symbol of 1BBA is "Red 7" on all reels 31 (PB ≠ 1), "Red 7" cannot be stopped at the effective line unless it is pressed.

Similarly, the 1BBB table is used when the game is won when the accessory condition device number "2" is won (1BBB is won alone), or when 1BBB is won before the previous game and is not won in this game, and the reel 31 is used. Within the range of the stop control of, the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BBB is stopped on the effective line, and the combination of symbols corresponding to the combinations other than 1BBB is not stopped on the effective line. The combination is defined.
Since the symbol of 1BBB is "PB ≠ 1" for all reels 31 as in 1BBA, "red 7" and "black 7" cannot be stopped at the effective line unless the eyes are pressed.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, the following stop control is performed in a game in which 1BB and a small role or replay are duplicated, or in a game in which 1BB is won before the previous game and the small role or replay is won in this game. Can be mentioned.

For example, first, priority is given to stopping both the winning 1BB and the small winning combination or replay symbol on the effective line, and when both symbols cannot be stopped on the effective line, the winning small symbol. A stop control that gives priority to stopping the combination or replay symbol on the effective line can be mentioned. Note that the stop control for stopping both the 1BB and the small win or replay symbol on the effective line is up to the second stop, and at the time of the third stop, 1BB or the small win or replay is controlled to win a prize, and a plurality of The role of is not duplicated.
Secondly, priority is given to stopping both the winning 1BB and the small winning combination or replay symbol on the effective line, and when both symbols cannot be stopped on the effective line, the winning 1BB is selected. There is a stop control (opposite to the above) that gives priority to stopping the symbol of.

Thirdly, although priority is given to stopping the winning small win or replay symbol on the effective line, when stopping the winning small win or replay symbol on the effective line, When the winning 1BB symbol can be stopped at the effective line at the same time, stop control for stopping at that position can be mentioned.

When 1BB (“PB ≠ 1”) and the small winning combination or replay of “PB = 1” are won in duplicate (when they are winning at the same time), the winning 1BB symbol and the small winning combination or replay It is not necessary to control to stop both the symbol and the symbol on the effective line, and it is also possible to control so that only the small winning combination of "PB = 1" or the symbol of the replay is stopped on the effective line. Therefore, since the small winning combination E1 and E2 are "PB = 1", only the small winning combination E1 or E2 is obtained when the 1BBA and the small winning combination E1 of the present embodiment are duplicated or when the 1BBB and the small winning combination E2 are duplicated. It is also possible to execute stop control to win a prize.

The explanation is returned to FIG.
The winning determination means 66 determines whether or not the combination of the symbols of the reels 31 stopped on the effective line matches the combination of the symbols corresponding to any of the winning combinations when the reels 31 are stopped (whether any of the winning combinations has won a prize). Whether or not) is judged. The winning determination means 66 determines a symbol on the effective line by detecting, for example, the angle at which the motor 32 is stopped, the number of steps, and the like.

When the winning determination means 66 determines that the combination of symbols stopped on the effective line when the reel 31 is stopped matches the combination of symbols corresponding to any of the winning combinations, the payout means 67 wins the winning combination. , A predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player according to the winning combination, or processing such as addition of credits is performed. In addition, when the replay wins a prize, the number of medals inserted in the game is controlled to be automatically inserted without paying out the medals.

The RT control means 68 determines whether or not the RT transition condition is satisfied when all reels 31 are stopped in each game, and if it is determined that the RT transition condition is satisfied, the RT control means 68 controls to perform the RT transition. It is a thing.
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an RT transition diagram in the present embodiment. As described above, the RT of the present embodiment includes non-RT, RT1 to RT4, 1BBA operation (1BBA game), and 1BBB operation (1BBB game). Then, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the type (number) of the condition devices to be drawn and the winning probability thereof are different for each RT.

In the present embodiment, the RT transition timing is set when the stop display of the symbol combination or when the RT transition combination is won, that is, when all the reels are stopped (when all reels 31 are stopped). Therefore, for example, when the pattern symbol is stopped when all reels 31 are stopped during RT1, RT shifts from RT1 to RT2 when all reels are stopped. The transition from non-RT, RT1 to RT3 to RT4 may be performed based on the winning of 1BB, or based on the fact that 1BB did not win in the game that won 1BB. May be good. In the present embodiment, the game shifts to RT4 based on the fact that 1BB did not win in the game in which 1BB was won.

Non-internal medium games correspond to non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3. In addition, the internal medium game corresponds to RT4.
Further, during the advantageous section, the slot machine 10 is basically controlled to stay at RT3, but when a player makes a mistake in pressing the stop switch 42, he / she may stay at RT2. is there. In the case of an advantageous section that ends with only one instruction function operating game (excluding the game that wins the small winning combination C group, the replay B group, and the replay C group), it is not necessary to stay at RT3. That is, in RT2, one instruction function operation game (excluding the game in which the small winning combination C group, the replay B group, and the replay C group are won) may be performed to end the advantageous section. Of course, you may basically stay at RT3.

In the non-RT, RT1 to RT3 non-internal middle games, a lottery of the character condition device is performed. Then, when 1BB is won in these RTs and 1BB is not won, the RT control means 68 determines that the transition condition of RT is satisfied, and shifts to RT4 corresponding to the internal middle game.
In addition, when 1BB wins in a game that wins 1BB, the operation of 1BBA or 1BBB starts when the game is completely stopped this time, so in this case, RT4 (internal middle game) is not used.

RT4 will continue until the winning 1BB wins. When it is determined that 1BBA or 1BBB has won a prize in RT4, the RT control means 68 determines that the transition condition of RT is satisfied, and shifts to 1BBA operation (1BBA game) or 1BBB operation (1BBB game), respectively.
When 1BBA is in operation, it is continued until the operation end condition of 1BBA is satisfied. In the present embodiment, the operation end condition of 1BBA is set so that the number of payouts exceeds 150.

The RT control means 68 determines whether or not more than 150 medals have been paid out during each game and 1BBA operation, and when it is determined that more than 150 medals have been paid out, the termination condition of the 1BBA operation It is determined that the condition is satisfied, and control is performed so as to shift to non-RT from the next game.

The same applies to the 1BBB operation. If the transition is made during the operation of 1BBB, it is continued until the operation end condition of 1BBB is satisfied. In the present embodiment, the termination condition of the 1BBB operation is set to pay out more than 200 medals.
The RT control means 68 determines whether or not more than 200 medals have been paid out for each game, and if it determines that more than 200 medals have been paid out, it determines that the operation termination condition of 1BBB is satisfied. From the next game, it is controlled to shift to RT1.

Replay is not included in the count of 150 or 200 sheets during 1BB operation. As shown in FIG. 17, while 1BB is in operation, replay D may be won, but the automatic bet at the time of winning the replay is not counted in the number of payouts. Therefore, the more the replay D is won, the more the number of games played during 1BB operation. In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, the winning probability of the replay D during 1BBA operation is set to 10 times that during 1BBB operation, so that the expected value of the number of games during 1BBA operation is 1BBB operation. It will be more than the expected value of the number of games in.

During the operation of 1BBA and 1BBB, as described above, the RB is continuously operated. The RB ends when either of the two winning combinations or the two games is satisfied, and after the end, the RB is operated again on condition that the end condition of the 1BB operation is not satisfied.
Further, as shown in FIG. 18, the winning probability of the small winning combination E2 during the operation of 1BBA is set higher in the setting 6 than in the setting 1. When the small winning combination E2 is won and the small winning combination 36 or 38 wins, the number of payouts is two. As a result, the number of games played in setting 6 is larger than that in setting 1 until the end condition (exceeding 150 cards) is reached during 1BBA operation. Therefore, during the operation of 1BBA in the advantageous section, the expected value of winning the replay D is higher in the setting 6 than in the setting 1, so that the probability that the advantageous section is added is higher. Details on this point will be described in the control of the advantageous section described later.

When the RWM53 is initialized, the game is started from non-RT. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and RT may be maintained even when the RWM53 is initialized. Here, for example, when the RWM53 is initialized while the winning of 1BB is carried over, the winning of 1BB is also maintained (carried over).

In non-RT, the RT control means 68 continues non-RT until the pattern symbol is displayed. In the non-RT, the small winning combination B group is drawn, and if any of the small winning combination B groups is won and the winning small winning combination is missed, the pattern pattern is displayed. When the pattern symbol is displayed in the non-RT, the RT control means 68 determines that the RT transition condition is satisfied, and shifts to RT2 from the next game.
In RT1, as in the case of non-RT, RT1 is maintained until the pattern symbol is displayed. Then, when the pattern symbol is displayed in RT1, the process shifts to RT2.

RT2 is the RT with the highest stay rate in the normal section. In RT2, when the replay B group is won and the replay 02 wins, it is judged that the RT transition condition is satisfied, and the game shifts to RT3 from the next game.
On the other hand, in RT3, it continues until the pattern symbol is displayed or the replay C group is won and the replay 03 wins. When the pattern symbol is displayed or the replay 03 wins in RT3, it is determined that the RT transition condition is satisfied, and the game shifts to RT2 from the next game.

As described above, in the normal section (and non-internal), most of the time, the person goes back and forth between RT2 and RT3, but the probability of staying at RT2 is the highest. When 1BB is won in RT2 and RT3 (including non-RT and RT1), the transition to RT4 (internal) from the next game is as described above.

In addition, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section during the normal section and the game decided to shift to the advantageous section is RT3, in order to maintain RT3, the instruction function at the time of winning the replay C group Is activated, and the correct answer pressing order for winning the replay 01 is displayed. This prevents the vehicle from falling to RT2. In addition, when the small winning combination B group is won, the correct answer pressing order for winning the small winning combination 01 is displayed by activating the instruction function. Similarly, when the small winning combination C group is won, the correct answer pressing order for winning the small winning combination 02 is displayed by activating the instruction function.

On the other hand, when the game decided to shift to the advantageous section is RT2, the correct answer to win the replay 02 by activating the instruction function at the time of winning the replay B group while activating the instruction function as described above. The push order is displayed and controlled to shift to RT3.
Further, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section when it is non-RT or RT1, it shifts to the advantageous section even during non-RT or RT1, but the instruction function is displayed until the pattern symbol is displayed. In a game in which the operation is possible (for example, when the small winning combination B group is won), the instruction function is not activated and the pattern symbol is displayed. Then, when the pattern symbol is displayed in non-RT or RT1 and the pattern shifts to RT2, the instruction function is activated in the same manner as described above.

The advantageous section control means 69 is a means for executing transition from a normal section to an advantageous section (including a standby section), determination of whether or not to end the advantageous section, addition in the advantageous section, operation control of an instruction function, and the like. is there.
First, the advantageous section control means 69 determines whether or not to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section and the non-internal middle game.
Further, the advantageous section control means 69 determines whether or not to add the number of games in the advantageous section in the advantageous section and the non-internal middle game.

Whether or not to shift to the advantageous section during the normal section is determined in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, when the specific condition device is won in the lottery by the combination lottery means 61, at the same time, the advantageous section is selected. Decide to migrate. Further, when deciding to shift to the advantageous section, it is limited to being in the non-internal section, and it is not decided to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section in the internal section.

Further, as described above, when the transition to the advantageous section is determined according to the winning combination lottery result (winning conditional device), the winning of the conditional device having a setting difference cannot be a condition.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, there is a case where the normal section shifts to the advantageous section on condition that the condition device having common settings is won.

As shown in FIG. 17, for example, when a single BBA is won, there are cases where it is decided to shift to an advantageous section and cases where it is not decided to shift. When a random number value included in the range of the number "20" is extracted from the number "30" assigned to the single winning of 1BBA, it is decided to shift to the advantageous section and the number "10". When the random number value included in the range of is extracted, it is decided not to shift to the advantageous interval. The same applies to the single winning of "1BBA + small winning combination D", "1BBA + small winning combination E1", and small winning combination E1.

Further, when the condition device shown in FIG. 17 is won during the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added in each case. In addition, when these condition devices are won, it is possible to perform an additional lottery instead of uniformly adding an advantageous section, or to draw a lottery as to whether or not to perform an additional lottery. However, in the present embodiment, in order to simplify the explanation, the advantageous sections are uniformly added.

When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section, the advantageous section with a predetermined number of games may be set, or the number of games in the advantageous section may be determined by lottery or the like. Alternatively, instead of determining the end condition of the advantageous section by the number of games, the end condition other than the number of games (for example, the number of payouts, the difference number, the number of winnings of the small winning combination B group, the number of times the instruction function is operated, etc.) may be set. Good. In the present embodiment, when the condition device shown in FIG. 17 is won in the normal section, the section shifts to the advantageous section in which the end conditions are set as described below.
Specifically, for example, it can be defined as follows.
When 1BBA alone is won (number of places "20"): Initial value is counted after the end of 1BB game and shifts to the advantageous section of 100 games 1BBA + small winning combination D When winning multiple times (number of places "5"): Initial value is 1BB Counting after the end of the game and shifting to the advantageous section of 250 games 1BBA + small winning combination E1 When multiple winnings (number of positions "20"): Initial value counts after the end of 1BB game and shifts to the advantageous section of 200 games Small When the combination D is won alone (number of placements "50"): Advantageous section of 150 games with an initial value Small combination E1 When alone is won (number of positions "250"): Advantageous section of 100 games with an initial value, or one small combination One of the advantageous sections ending by the operation of the instruction function at the time of winning the group B (which may be decided by lottery, or included in the range of the number "120" out of the number "250" When the random value is extracted, the initial value is set as an advantageous section of 100 games, and when the random value included in the range of the number "130" is extracted, the instruction function at the time of winning the small winning combination B once. It may be an advantageous section that ends with operation)

Since the winning probability of the small role D is lower than the winning probability of the small role E1, in order to give a premier feeling when the small role D is won, the number of games in the advantageous section when the small role D is won is set to a small number. It is set more than when the role E1 is won. The number of games in the advantageous section when the small winning combination E1 is won may be set to be larger than that when the small winning combination D is won.
Also, when the condition device shown in FIG. 17 is won during the advantageous section, for example, when 1BBA alone is won, the number of games played in the advantageous section is added by "30", and when the small winning combination E1 is won alone (number of positions "250"). ) Adds "50" to the number of games, and "20" is added to the number of games when the small winning combination E1 is won alone (number of places "750").

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 17, in the normal section, when the small winning combination E1 is won alone, it is decided to shift to the advantageous section with a probability of "1/4"("250" out of the total number of "1000"). To do.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18, the single winning probability of the small winning combination E2 is set higher in the setting 6 than in the setting 1.

Therefore, the higher the setting, the higher the appearance rate of the middle cherry, but the probability that the middle cherry will be determined to shift to the advantageous section when the middle cherry appears is higher in the setting 1 than in the setting 6.
That is, although there is no setting difference in the probability of deciding to shift to the advantageous section, it is possible to give the player the impression that there is a setting difference.
Contrary to the present embodiment, the setting 1 may be higher than the setting 6 for the single winning probability of the small winning combination E2 in FIG.
In this way, the lower the setting, the higher the probability of appearance of the middle cherry, but the lower the probability of being determined to shift to the advantageous section when the middle cherry appears.
In addition, during the advantageous section, when the small winning combination E1 is won alone, the advantageous section is always added. On the other hand, when the small winning combination E2 alone is won in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is not added. Therefore, the higher the setting, the higher the appearance ratio of the middle cherry, but the probability that the advantageous section is added when the middle cherry appears is higher in the setting 1 than in the setting 6. Therefore, although there is no setting difference in the probability that the advantageous section is added, it is possible to give the player the impression that there is a setting difference.

Further, 1BBA is a special combination in which the number of winnings is common (except when 1BBA and small combination D are duplicated), and 1BBB is a special combination having a setting difference in the number of winnings.
In this case, when the 1BBA common to the setting is won during the advantageous section and the 1BBA is in operation, the advantageous section can be added during the operation of the 1BBA. On the other hand, when 1BBB having a setting difference during the advantageous section is won and 1BBB is in operation, it is stipulated that the advantageous section cannot be added during the operation of 1BBB. It is stipulated that when 1BBA and small winning combination D, which have different settings during the advantageous section, are elected in duplicate and 1BBA is in operation, the advantageous section cannot be added during the operation of 1BBA.

On the other hand, when setting 1 and setting 6 are compared while 1BBA is operating, the winning probability of the small winning combination A is lower in setting 6 than in setting 1, and the winning probability of small winning combination E2 is set in setting 1 in setting 1. Higher than. Therefore, since the operation end condition of 1BBA is set to pay out more than 150 sheets, the number of games (expected value) during 1BBA operation is larger in setting 6 than in setting 1.
Therefore, for example, if it is set to add an advantageous section when the replay D is won, the expected value of the number of times the replay D is won during the operation of 1BBA is higher in the setting 6 than in the setting 1, so the higher the setting, the higher the setting. It is possible to easily add an advantageous section.

Further, during the operation of 1BBA, when the number of games reaches a predetermined number, the advantageous section may be added.
As described above, during 1BBA operation, the expected value of the number of games during 1BBA operation is higher in setting 6 than in setting 1.
As described above, the operation termination condition of 1BBA is set that more than 150 sheets have been paid out. On the other hand, the expected number of payouts per game during 1BBA operation is about "8.664" in setting 1 and about "8.557" in setting 6. Therefore, the expected value of the number of games in which the number of payouts reaches 150 is about "17.3" in setting 1 and about "17.5" in setting 6.
Therefore, when the number of games reaches, for example, the 18th game during 1BBA operation, if it is decided to unconditionally add the advantageous section, the higher the set value, the easier it is to add the advantageous section. be able to.
Further, during the operation of 1BBA, the advantageous section may be added every time a certain number of games have elapsed. Even in this way, the higher the set value, the easier it is to add the advantageous section.

On the other hand, since 1BBB is a special role having a setting difference, it is not possible to add an advantageous section while 1BBB is operating.
Further, as shown in FIG. 22, after the operation of 1BBA is completed, it shifts to non-RT, and when it shifts to non-RT, it stays in non-RT until the pattern symbol is displayed, and when the pattern symbol is displayed. Moves to RT2. That is, after the operation of 1BBA is completed, it does not go through RT1.

On the other hand, after the operation of 1BBB is completed, the process shifts to RT1 and stays in RT1 until the pattern symbol is displayed. In RT1, replay E is drawn by lottery, and as shown in FIG. 17, if RT1 is in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added when the replay E is won. As a result, after the 1BBB operation is completed, the probability of adding the advantageous section is higher than after the 1BBA operation is completed. Then, if the number of additional games in the advantageous section at the time of winning the replay E is set to an appropriate value, it is possible to balance after the end of the 1BBA operation and after the end of the 1BBB operation.

Then, when the advantageous section is maintained and the transition to RT1 is performed, the instruction function is not activated in a game in which the instruction function can be activated (for example, when the small winning combination B group is won) until the pattern symbol is displayed, and the pattern symbol is not activated. Wait until is displayed. Then, when the pattern symbol is displayed in RT1 and the pattern shifts to RT2, the instruction function is activated. When the advantageous section is maintained and the transition to RT1 is performed, the small winning combination 01 wins a prize by activating the instruction function when the small winning combination B group is won, and the pattern (unless there is a mistake in the pushing order). The design is not displayed. Therefore, when shifting to RT1 during the advantageous section, it is possible to continue staying at RT1 until the advantageous section ends. A game in which the instruction function is activated when the small winning combination B group is won, and after the predetermined number of games, the instruction function can be activated until the pattern symbol is displayed, not until the end of the advantageous section. For example, when the small winning combination B group is won), the instruction function may not be activated and the pattern may be waited until the pattern is displayed.

Further, when the advantageous section control means 69 decides to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section, the advantageous section control means 69 controls so as to light the advantageous section display LED 77 by the time when a predetermined timing arrives, and is not the advantageous section (normally). When it is a section or a standby section), the advantageous section display LED 77 is controlled to be turned off.
First, when the advantageous section control means 69 decides to shift to the advantageous section, after the end of the game determined to shift to the advantageous section (when all reels 31 are stopped and there is a payout, a medal is awarded. Turn on the advantageous section display LED 77 until the medal insertion (bet) for the next game (after payout) becomes possible, and until the settlement switch 46 can be operated (settlement processing operation) when holding a stored medal. To control.

Secondly, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the conditional device including 1BB that can carry over the winning information after the next game, the combination of the symbols corresponding to 1BB is stopped. The advantageous section display LED 77 is controlled to be turned on.
Therefore, if the transition to the advantageous section is decided based on the winning of the conditional device including the special role, the special role is a special role that carries the winning information to the next game, for example, 1BB, 2BB, and RB. In some cases, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on before the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination is stopped (only when a standby section is provided).

On the other hand, if the special role is a special role such as SB or CB that is valid only in the winning game and the winning information is not carried over to the next game, the winning condition device that includes only the small role or replay is selected. As in the case of deciding to shift to the advantageous section based on the above, it is necessary to turn on the advantageous section display LED 77 until the medal insertion (bet) of the next game becomes possible and the settlement switch 46 can be operated. is there.

FIG. 23 is a diagram showing timing 1 and timing 2 as timings for turning on the advantageous section display LED 77.
In the present embodiment, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, as the lighting timing of the advantageous section display LED 77, first, "from the time when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, after the end of this game (all). Until the medals for the next game can be inserted (bet) and the settlement switch 46 can be operated (hereinafter, this timing is referred to as "predetermined timing") after the reel 31 is stopped and the medals are paid out. The advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on. Then, when the start switch 41 of the next game is operated, the advantageous section starts. That is, in the present embodiment, as a general rule, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before the advantageous section starts. This makes it possible to prevent the player from stopping the game without knowing it after deciding to shift to the advantageous section.

In FIG. 23, timing 1 shows an example in this case. In this example, when the small winning combination E1 is (independently) won and it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the small winning combination E1, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing. As in this example, when it is decided to shift the winning information to the advantageous section based on the winning of the conditional device that does not include 1BB that can be carried over to the next game or later, it is always applied.

Secondly, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the conditional device including 1BB that can be carried over to the next game or later, the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BB is displayed. By then, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on. Then, when the start switch 41 of the next game of the game in which the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BB is displayed is operated, the advantageous section starts. In the present embodiment, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before the advantageous section starts.
In FIG. 23, timing 2 shows an example in this case. In this example, when 1BBA and small winning combination E1 are won in duplicate and it is decided to shift to an advantageous section based on this duplicate winning, the advantageous section is displayed by the time the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BBA is displayed. The LED 77 is turned on. Therefore, as long as the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BBA is displayed, the lighting timing may be before that, for example, timing 1 (for example, when a standby section is not provided).

Therefore, when it is decided to shift the winning information to the advantageous section based on the winning of the conditional device including the special combination that can be carried over to the next game or later, the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination is uniformly displayed. When this is done, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on. Alternatively, even if the transition to the advantageous section is based on the winning of the conditional device including the special combination, it is uniformly decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the conditional device not including the special combination. As in the case, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on by a predetermined timing.

Alternatively, when it is decided to shift the winning information to the advantageous section based on the winning of the conditional device including the special combination that can be carried over to the next game or later, the lighting timing may be decided by lottery or the like.
Further, when it is decided to shift the winning information to the advantageous section based on the winning of the conditional device including the special combination that can be carried over to the next game or later, for example, other than the timing 1 and timing 2 shown in FIG. 23, for example. In the next game of the game in which the special role is won, when the start switch 41 is operated, at least a part of the reels 31 is rotating, or when the third stop switch 42 is operated (regardless of whether or not the role is won), etc. It may be.

In that case, when the start switch 41 of the next game of the game is operated, the advantageous section starts (the waiting section ends in the next game of the game in which the special role is won). In addition, when the start switch 41 is operated in a game in which the special role can be won after the next game of the game in which the special role is won, at least a part of the reels 31 is rotated. It may be in the middle or when the third stop switch 42 is operated (regardless of whether or not the winning combination is won). In that case, when the start switch 41 of the next game of the game is operated, the advantageous section will start (the waiting section will end in the game in which the special role can be won. ).

Here, for example, when the small winning combination E1 is won, the 59th "Red 7"-"Cherry"-"Red 7" (FIG. 9) of the small winning combination 36 can be stopped. Then, it is assumed that "Red 7"-"Rotating"-"Red 7" has stopped as a result of pinching in the game when 1BBA is won. Next, when the player aimed at the "cherry" when the middle reel 31 was stopped, but the "cherry" did not stop at the effective line (kicking control was controlled), the small winning combination E1 was won in the game. You can see that it is not. Then, in this case, if the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing, the player knows that the 1BBA is a single winning, and the 1BBA symbol is used in the next game of the game when the 1BBA is won. It becomes possible to push the combination of. That is, the lighting of the advantageous section display LED 77 functions as a winning notification of 1BBA. This is because it is not decided to shift to an advantageous section at the time of loss (when not winning). Conventionally, when 1BB is won, there is a tendency to perform continuous production (effect to incite whether or not 1BB is won) and then notify the winning of 1BB, but the advantageous section display LED77 is displayed by a predetermined timing. If it is turned on, such continuous production will be wasted.
Therefore, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the conditional device including the 1BB that can be carried over to the next game or later, the case where the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on until the winning 1BB wins the prize. To have.

On the other hand, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of "1BBA + small winning combination E1", if the winning of the small winning combination E1 is prioritized in the game, 1BBA will not be won in the game.
On the other hand, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the single winning of the small winning combination E1, it is necessary to turn on the advantageous section display LED 77 by a predetermined timing (because the standby section cannot be provided). ).
Therefore, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of "1BBA + small winning combination E1", if the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on until the winning 1BBA wins, the small winning combination E1 At the time of winning the prize, the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up by a predetermined timing, so that the player knows that 1BBA has not been won twice.

Therefore, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of "1BBA + small winning combination E1", the case where the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing (timing 1 shown in FIG. 23) and the predetermined A case where the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on even after the timing has passed (timing 2 shown in FIG. 23) is provided. Which one to use is, for example, sorted according to the number of "1BBA + small winning combination E1" at the time of winning, or when "1BBA + small winning combination E1" is won (only when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section). A lottery (two-stage lottery) for whether or not to turn on the display LED 77 immediately (whether or not to provide a standby section) can be mentioned. As a result, even if the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing, it does not mean that 1BBA has not been won twice, and the player's expectation can be continuously fueled.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the small winning combination E1 is set to "PB = 1", the small winning combination E1 is always applicable regardless of whether the "1BBA + small winning combination E1" is won or the small winning combination E1 is won alone. The small role E1 (small role 36 or 38) wins the game.
However, it is also possible to set the small combination included in the condition device of the small combination E1 to "PB ≠ 1". Then, when the small winning combination included in the condition device of the small winning combination E1 is set to "PB ≠ 1" and it is decided to shift to the advantageous section at the time of winning "1BBA + small winning combination E1", the small winning combination E1 At the time of winning, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing, but when the small winning combination E1 is not won, it is possible to control that the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on even after the predetermined timing has passed.

However, not limited to the above, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the conditional device including the special combination that can be carried over to the next game or later, the advantageous section display LED77 is always used by the predetermined timing. May be turned on (always timing 1 shown in FIG. 23), or the advantageous section display LED 77 may not always be turned on even after a predetermined timing has elapsed (always shown in FIG. 23). Timing 2).

Further, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section at the time of the single winning of the small winning combination D and the single winning of the small winning combination E1, it is necessary to turn on the advantageous section display LED 77 by a predetermined timing (a standby section is provided). Because it cannot be done), it becomes a so-called immediate notification, and it is not possible to fuel the expectations of the player.
Therefore, as described above, when the small winning combination E1 is won alone, there are two advantageous sections: an advantageous section that continues until the predetermined number of games is exhausted, and an advantageous section that ends with the operation of the instruction function when the small winning combination B group is won once. Set the type. Then, after turning on the advantageous section display LED 77, until the first small winning combination B group is elected, an effect that incites the degree of expectation (as a final result, whether or not it is an advantageous section that continues until the predetermined number of games is exhausted). By outputting (such as a continuous effect indicating), even if the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing, it is possible to fuel the expectations of the player even after that. This is because even if the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, it is not known at the time when the advantageous section is turned on whether the advantageous section continues until the predetermined number of games is exhausted.

Even when the small winning combination E1 is won alone, if the advantageous section is not transferred, the advantageous section display LED77 does not light in the first place, so it is necessary to output a continuous effect (such as an effect that encourages whether or not to shift to the advantageous section). Absent.
Further, when the above-mentioned condition device is won, the instruction function at the time of winning the small winning combination B group is not set as one winning of the small winning combination B group (one instruction function operating game) or a predetermined number of games. It is also possible to determine the number of times of operation of the above by lottery, for example, within the range of 1 to 50 times.

As a specific process for turning on the advantageous section display LED 77, the 8th bit of the segment data for displaying the digit 2 is changed from "0" to "1". Since the segment data for displaying the digit 2 is stored in the RWM 53, the segment data is changed. For example, the segment data up to that point and the data obtained by ORing "10000000" may be stored in the RWM 53 as new data. As a result, the value corresponding to the segment DP becomes "1" in the segment data of the digit 2.

Further, as described above, the digits of the present embodiment include a total of nine digits 1 to 9, and as a method of lighting these digits, control can be mentioned as follows.
The main control board 50 executes "interrupt processing" every 2.235 ms in parallel with this main process, in addition to the "(game progress) main process" which is a process of repeating each game. In this interrupt process, LED lighting control, reel 31 drive control, external signal transmission processing, and the like are performed. Then, in the present embodiment, for digits 1 to 9, dynamic lighting is executed in which one digit is lit for each interrupt process. For example, in the current interrupt processing, only digit 1 is lit, and in the next interrupt processing, digit 2 is lit. By repeating this, one digit is turned on at a rate of once in nine interrupt processes. In addition to such dynamic lighting, static lighting in which signal lines are connected for each digit may be executed.

Therefore, when it is time to turn on the advantageous section display LED 77, the segment data is changed as described above. After the change, the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up when the lighting timing of the digit 2 arrives due to the interrupt processing.

Further, in the game in which the instruction function should be activated during the advantageous section, the advantageous section control means 69 obtains the number of acquisitions by operating the instruction function separately from the notification of the correct answer pressing order by the sub control board 80 described later. The push order instruction information is displayed on the display LED 78. For example, when the small winning combination B1 is won, the push order instruction information "= 1" corresponding to the push order instruction number "A1" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. This control corresponds to the "operation of the instruction function" in the present embodiment.

It is the instruction function operation game during the advantageous section
1) Non-RT and RT1: When the small winning combination C group is won (when the small winning combination B group is won, the pattern pattern is displayed, so the instruction function does not operate.)
2) RT2: When the replay B group is won, when the small role B group is won, and when the small role C group is won 3) RT3: When the replay C group is won, when the small role B group is won, and when the small role C group is won. ..

Further, as described above, when the small winning combination A is won, the instruction function is operated as a dummy. When the small role A is won, the small role 01 wins regardless of the push order, so no matter which push order is specified, there is no disadvantage to the player, so even if a specific push order is displayed, the game It does not harm the justice of.
Specifically, when the small winning combination A is won, one of the push order instruction numbers "A1" to "A3" may be selected by a lottery using a random number or the like.

Further, when the small winning combination E1 is won when the upper limit of the advantageous section is approaching, the advantageous section control means 69 selects the push order instruction number "A3" and displays the push order of the right first stop. As a result, it is possible to prevent the middle cherry from appearing when the upper limit of the advantageous section is approaching.

In the present embodiment, in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added when the small winning combination E1 is won, and the advantageous section is not added when the small winning combination E2 is won. Therefore, when the small winning combination E2 in the advantageous section is won, it is always added. , Displaying the right first stop so that the middle cherry is not displayed. In particular, since the advantageous section is always added when the small winning combination E1 is won in the advantageous section, it is possible to give the player the impression that the advantageous section is added by displaying the middle cherry. Therefore, when it is not desired to display the middle cherry in a game in which the advantageous section is not added (when the small winning combination E2 is won), the right first stop is displayed.

Further, for example, when the upper limit of the advantageous section is approaching (when the advantageous section cannot be added), in order to prevent the middle cherry from being displayed, either the small winning combination E1 or the small winning combination E2 is won. However, when the instruction function is activated, the right first stop is displayed and the middle cherry is not displayed.

In the present embodiment, the maximum number of games in the advantageous section is set to "1500 games". Therefore, for example, when the number of games from the start of the advantageous section becomes "1400 games" or more and the small winning combination E1 (and E2) is won, the right first stop is displayed by activating the instruction function. ..
As described above, the "operation of the instruction function" in the present invention refers to the display of the operation mode of the stop switch 42 which is advantageous to the player, but in the present embodiment, the appearance of the middle-stage cherry is avoided. The display of the pressing order is also included in the "operation of the instruction function". Of course, such a case may not be included in the "operation of the instruction function", and the pressing order may be displayed only on the image display device 23.

In the present embodiment, an advantageous section counter 69a and an upper limit counter 69b are provided as counters for counting the number of games played for the advantageous section (see FIG. 1).
The advantageous section counter 69a sets the initial value of the number of games (for example, "100") determined at that time when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section. Then, the count value is decremented every time one game is digested, and when it becomes "0", the advantageous section ends. In addition, some decrements are performed from the game that has shifted to the advantageous section, and some are performed after the end of the 1BB game. Further, when the advantageous section counter 69a is determined to shift to the advantageous section, it is not necessary to set the initial value of the number of games (for example, "100") determined at that time, and after the end of the 1BB game. It may be the one that sets the initial value.
Further, when an advantageous section is added during the advantageous section, a value corresponding to the added value is added to the current count value of the advantageous section counter 69a.

For example, when the count value of the advantageous section counter 69a is "55", it is determined to add the advantageous section, and when the number of additional games is "30", the count value is changed from "55" to "55". Update to "85". Then, each time one game is digested, "84", "83", and so on are decremented one game at a time.

Further, when 1BBA is in operation (excluding those based on duplicate winning of 1BBA and small winning combination D), the counting by the advantageous section counter 69a is continued, but when 1BBB is in operation, the advantageous section counter 69a Suspend counting by. In this embodiment, the setting in this way enables the addition of the advantageous section during the operation of 1BBA (excluding the one based on the duplicate winning of 1BBA and the small winning combination D), but the addition of the advantageous section is possible during the operation of 1BBB. Since the addition is not executed, it is set as described above in order to balance both sides (so that the operation of 1BBBA in the advantageous section is not extremely disadvantageous to the player than the operation of 1BBBA). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the counting by the advantageous section counter 69a may be continued even when either 1BBA or 1BBB is operating, or the advantageous section counter may be continued even when either 1BBA or 1BBB is operating. The counting by 69a may be interrupted.

On the other hand, after winning 1BBA or 1BBB during the advantageous section, the counting by the advantageous section counter 69a is continued until 1BBA or 1BBB wins, respectively (inside). When 1BB is won, or when it is notified that 1BB has been won, the counting by the advantageous section counter 69a may be interrupted at that time. Even if the count by the advantageous section counter 69a is interrupted when 1BB is won, the remaining number of games in the advantageous section displayed on the image display device 23 is until it is notified that 1BB has been won. You may try to decrement one game at a time.

In addition, there is a case where a conditional device including 1BB is won in a normal section (such as a duplicate winning of 1BBA and a small winning combination E1), and the section shifts to an advantageous section based on the winning of this conditional device. In this case, the waiting section is started from the next game (only when the waiting section is provided), and the inside of 1BB is set.
On the other hand, when the condition device including 1BB in the advantageous section is won, it is in the advantageous section and inside the 1BB, and the advantage section is not added in the inside of the 1BB in the advantageous section.

Therefore, if the condition device including 1BB is won in the normal section and the shift to the standby section has not yet been made to the advantageous section, a long fanning effect (whether or not the 1BB has been won is notified. It is considered that it is not so disadvantageous to the player even if the output (for example, continuous production over a plurality of games) is output. This is because the advantage section counter 69a does not count (decrement) or the upper limit counter 69b, which will be described later, does not count (decrement) during the standby section because it is not in the advantageous section.
On the other hand, when the condition device including 1BB in the advantageous section is won and the inside is inside, the count (decrement) by the advantage section counter 69a and the upper limit counter 69b described later are performed even after the inside is inside. Count (decrement) is performed. In this case, since it is not possible to add an advantageous section, it is preferable to notify the winning of 1BB at an early stage without performing an unnecessarily long fanning effect.
Specifically, for example, the average number of games played by the former fanning effect is set to 4 games, and the average number of games played by the latter fanning effect is set to 2 games.

On the other hand, when it is decided to win the small winning combination E1 independently and shift to the advantageous section in which the instruction function is activated when the small winning combination B group is won once, in the present embodiment, the advantageous section counter 69a counts. Do not set the value. In this case, regardless of the count value of the advantageous section counter 69a, the advantageous section is continued until the small winning combination B group is won. Then, when the small winning combination B group is won and the instruction function is activated, it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied in this game, and the advantageous section is ended.

If the number of times the instruction function is operated when the small winning combination B is won is set in advance as the end condition of the advantageous section, a counter (decrement counter) for counting the number of games played when the small winning combination B is won is provided in this counter. You may set "1". Then, when the instruction function is activated once when the small winning combination B group is won, the count value becomes "0", and it may be determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied.

By providing something like an advantageous section flag and setting it to "on" during the advantageous section, it is possible to determine whether or not the game is an advantageous section this time.
However, in the present embodiment, the 8th bit of the segment data of the digit 2 serves as an advantageous section flag. As described above, when it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied in this game, or when the count value of the advantageous section counter 69a becomes "0", the 8th bit in the segment data of digit 2 is set to "0". Execute the process to change to.

In addition, when it is decided to win the small winning combination E1 alone and shift to the advantageous section, it shifts to the advantageous section with a fixed number of games, or the instruction function is activated at the time of winning the small winning combination B group once. A lottery will be held to determine whether to shift to an advantageous section that ends (so-called fake advantageous section). Here, how to allocate the probabilities between the former and the latter is arbitrary.

Then, for example, when the small winning combination E1 is won independently and it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing, and an effect of inciting which advantageous section has been shifted is output. (You may continue until you win the small role B group). Next, when the small winning combination B group is won, if the instruction function is activated in the game and then the advantageous section ends with one operation of the instruction function, the advantageous section ends with this game (advantageous). The section display LED 77 is turned off). On the other hand, when the interval is shifted to the advantageous section of the predetermined number of games, the advantageous section is continued even after the next game (the lighting of the advantageous section display LED 77 is maintained).
In the above example, it is assumed that the small winning combination B group is won before the predetermined number of games is reached from the start of the advantageous section.

Further, the upper limit counter 69b always starts counting when the advantageous section is started (when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section, or "1500" is set at the start of the advantageous section), and then the advantageous section is started. Until the end of the section, the count is not interrupted under any circumstances, and the count value is decremented by "1" for each game. Further, for example, counting is continued even during 1BB operation. This point is different from the advantageous section counter 69a. The advantageous section counter 69a and the upper limit counter 69b may increment the count value by "1" from "0" for each game.

Then, when the value of the upper limit counter 69b becomes "0", the advantageous section control means 69 sets the advantageous section in the game this time even if the count value of the advantageous section counter 69a exceeds "0". (Forced) ends (the count value of the advantageous section counter 69a is updated to "0"), and the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off (the 8th bit in the segment data of digit 2 is updated to "0"). As described above, the count value of the upper limit counter 69b has the highest priority in the advantageous section, and when the count value of the upper limit counter 69b becomes "0", the advantageous section ends even if 1BB is in operation.

Further, during the advantageous section, it is necessary to execute the instruction function operating game in which the number of payouts is 9 (the maximum number of payouts when the specified number is 3) at least once. Therefore, in the advantageous section, it is necessary to execute the instruction function operating game at least once when the small winning combination B group is won, but when the value of the upper limit counter 69b becomes "0", the small winning combination B is never performed. Even if the instruction function operating game is not executed at the time of winning the group, or even if the small winning combination B group has never been won, the advantageous section is (forced) ended in this game, and the advantageous section display LED77 Turns off.
Further, the image display device 23 may display the number of remaining games, the number of digested games, or the like as an image with reference to the values of the advantageous section counter 69a and the upper limit counter 69b.

In FIG. 1, the external signal transmitting means 70 transmits an external signal to the external centralized terminal plate 100. This external signal is a signal indicating the start of the advantageous section, the end of the advantageous section, the start of the 1BB operation, the end of the 1BB operation, or the like.
The main control board 50 executes each game and game end check process, and updates the external signal control number during this game end check process.
In the present embodiment, the "external signal control number" is a number that takes different values depending on the start of the advantageous section, the end of the advantageous section, the start of the 1BB operation, and the end of the 1BB operation.

Further, when the start switch 41 is operated, the external signal flag is updated so that the value corresponds to the external signal control number. Then, after updating the external signal flag, the external signal transmitting means 70 transmits an external signal corresponding to the external signal flag from the output port 52. When this external signal is input to the external centralized terminal plate 100, it is transmitted to the hall computer 200. Then, the external signal is output to, for example, a data counter.

The control command transmitting means 71 transmits information (control command) necessary for the effect output by the sub control board 80 to the sub control board 80.
The control command includes, for example, a first control command and a second control command. Both the first control command and the second control command are, for example, 8-bit 1-byte data. One control command is a pair of a first control command and a second control command. Further, the first control command is data indicating the type of control command, and the second control command is data indicating parameters (variables).

For example, in the case of a control command indicating RT, the first control command is "33 (H)" (00110011 (B)) in this embodiment. Further, when the RT parameter is, for example, RT1, it is "00000001 (B)" in the present embodiment. Therefore, the 2-byte data in which these are combined, "00110011/00000001"("/" indicates between the first control command and the second control command, and is not actually present) is the RT control command. Is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80.
As for the push order instruction number (only during the advantageous section), the effect group number, and the accessory condition device number, the first control command is the type data and the second control command is RWM53, as in the RT above. It is the data stored in.

The control command transmitting means 71 does not transmit the winning and replay condition device numbers to the sub control board 80. For example, when the push order bell is won, there is a risk that the correct push order will be known based on the winning and replay condition device numbers due to fraudulent acts. On the other hand, regarding the accessory condition device number, there is no risk of fraudulent activity as described above. Therefore, for example, when 1BBA is won, the accessory condition device number "1" is transmitted to the sub-control board 80.

Further, when the condition device having the correct answer pressing order is won in the advantageous section, the pressing order instruction number corresponding to the correct answer pressing order is acquired and stored in the RWM 53. On the other hand, when the conditional device that is in the advantageous section and does not have the correct push order is won, the push order instruction number is not acquired or stored in the RWM53. Here, at the start of each game, the data of the push order instruction number of RWM53 is cleared, but the data after clearing is "A0". Therefore, the data of the push order instruction number of the RWM 53 is "A0" except when the condition device having the correct push order is won in the advantageous section.
Further, during the normal section or the standby section, even if the condition device having the correct push order is won, the push order instruction number is not acquired or stored in the RWM 53.

Then, when the condition device having the correct push order is won in the advantageous section, the control command transmission means 71 transmits the push order instruction number to the sub control board 80.
Further, the control command transmitting means 71 transmits the information of "A0" as the push order instruction number except when the condition device having the correct push order is won in the advantageous section.
Furthermore, the control command transmitting means 71 does not transmit the push order instruction number to the sub control board 80 when it is not in the advantageous section. It is conceivable that the control command transmitting means 71 uniformly transmits the push order instruction number of "A0" when it is not in the advantageous section, but in the present embodiment, when it is not in the advantageous section, the push order instruction is given. The number is not transmitted to the sub control board 80.

In FIG. 1, the sub CPU 85 of the sub control board 80 includes the effect output control means 91.
As described above, the effect output control means 91 controls each control command transmitted from the main control board 50, specifically, the RT number, the push order instruction number, the effect group number, the accessory condition device number, and the like. Based on the command, at what timing (when operating the start switch 41, when operating each stop switch 42, etc.), what kind of effect is output (how to turn on, blink, or turn off the lamp 21). , What kind of sound is output from the speaker 22, what kind of image is to be displayed on the image display device 23, etc.), and the specific production contents are determined by lottery.

Then, the effect output control means 91 controls the output of the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, and the image display device 23 according to the determination. Further, during 1BB operation or an advantageous section, the number of acquired cards, the number of games (the number of remaining games or the number of digested games), and the like are displayed as images. Further, in the advantageous section, when the instruction function is activated, the correct answer pressing order is notified (image display). For example, when a small winning combination B1 is won in a game in an advantageous section and a control command corresponding to the push order instruction number "A1" is received, the correct push order "left first stop" or "1- ○" -○ ”and other information that allows the player to easily know the correct answer pressing order. When the push order instruction number of "A0" is received in the advantageous section, the push order is not notified.

Furthermore, it can be said that the control command of the effect group number does not include information on which condition device was actually won, but includes rough winning information. For example, when the control command corresponding to the effect group number "5" is received, it is not possible for the sub-control board 80 side to know whether the small winning combination A, the small winning combination B group, or the small winning combination C group is won. .. However, it is possible to know whether the player has won the small winning combination A, the small winning combination B group, or the small winning combination C group. Therefore, it is possible to display an effect such as displaying a "bell" pattern or lighting a frame lamp in "yellow", which is the corresponding color of "bell".

Here, when the small winning combination A is won, the small winning combination 01 always wins regardless of which pressing order the stop switch 42 is operated. Therefore, immediately after the start switch 41 is operated, that is, the first stop switch. It is possible to perform a bell (yellow) effect before the is operated.
On the other hand, when the small winning combination B group or the small winning combination C group is won in the normal section, the bell (yellow) effect can be performed when the winning of the small winning combination 01 is confirmed, that is, after the operation of the first stop switch 42. preferable. Of course, it may be after the operation of the second stop switch 42 or after the operation of the third stop switch 42.

However, if the output timing of the effect when the small role A is won is different from the output timing of the effect when the small role B group or the small role C group is won, the small role A is assigned based on the difference in the timing. Since it is possible to determine whether the player has won the small winning combination B group or the small winning combination C group, the number of times the small winning combination A has been won can be counted, and the set value can be estimated.
Therefore, when the small winning combination A is won in the normal section, the output of the bell effect is started at the same timing as when the pressing order is correct when the small winning combination B group or the small winning combination C group is won, for example, immediately after the operation of the first stop switch 42. By doing so, it is possible to make it impossible to determine which of the small winning combination A, the small winning combination B group, and the small winning combination C group has been won. In particular, in the present embodiment, when any of the small winning combination A, the small winning combination B group, or the small winning combination C group is won, the control command corresponding to the same effect group number "5" is transmitted. .. In this way, the effect group numbers of the small combination A, the small combination B group, and the small combination C group are made the same (“5”), and on the sub control board 80 side that receives the effect group number, for example, the first stop switch. If it is designed so that the effect is output at the timing immediately after the operation of 42, the effect group numbers of the small combination A, the small combination B group, and the small combination C group are different ("5" to "7"). Designed to be more efficient than if it had been (in the latter case, when any of the production group numbers "5" to "7" is received, the production is output at the timing immediately after the operation of the first stop switch 42, for example. It is inefficient because it has to be designed to do so).

24 and 25 show the timing of transmitting the control command of the push order instruction number, the effect group number, and the accessory condition device number, and the display of the push order instruction information by the acquired number display LED 78 (operation of the instruction function (on the main side). It is a time chart which shows the notification (notification on the sub side) of the correct answer pressing order by the image display device 23. 24 and 25 show four examples 1 to 4.
In FIGS. 24 and 25, first, when the start switch 41 is operated by the player, the combination lottery means 61 draws the condition device, and the effect group number corresponding to the winning condition device is determined. Further, when the section is in the advantageous section, the push order instruction number corresponding to the winning condition device is determined.

Furthermore, the main control board 50 transmits control commands of the push order instruction number (only during the advantageous section), the effect group number, and the accessory condition device number to the sub control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 is in the advantageous section, the sub-control board 80 notifies the correct push order based on the received push order instruction number. On the other hand, when the main control board 50 is in the advantageous section, the push order instruction information corresponding to the push order instruction number is displayed by the operation of the instruction function.

In "Example 1" of FIG. 24, when the push order instruction number is determined, the push order instruction information is first displayed by the operation of the instruction function by the main control board 50. After that, the push order instruction number is transmitted, and then the effect group number and the accessory condition device number are transmitted. Next, the sub-control board 80 determines that the start switch 41 has been operated when the accessory condition device number is received, and notifies the correct push order based on the received push order instruction number. Both the display of the push order instruction information and the notification of the correct push order are performed until the reel 31 reaches the constant speed rotation.

Further, as in the present embodiment, when the correct answer pressing order is so-called three choices (first stop), the first (first) stop switch 42 is operated to notify the correct answer pressing order by the image display device 23. Until then. On the other hand, for example, when the correct answer pressing order is so-called 6 choices, the image display device 23 notifies the correct answer pressing order until the third (last) stop switch 42 is operated. Of course, even if the correct answer pressing order is so-called three choices as in the present embodiment, the correct answer pressing order may be continuously notified until the third (last) stop switch 42 is operated. is there.

In the present embodiment, when the first stop switch 42 is operated, the control command is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80 as described above, so that the sub control board 80 receives this control command. Therefore, it can be determined that the first stop switch 42 has been operated. Then, when the first stop switch 42 is operated, the image display device 23 ends the notification of the correct answer pressing order. It goes without saying that the effect other than the correct answer pressing order, for example, the image display (character display, etc.) peculiar to the advantageous section is continued.

Further, the push order instruction information is displayed by the acquired number display LED 78 until the winning determination is made on the main control board 50. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the correct answer pressing order is three choices as in the present embodiment, the pressing order instruction information may be displayed until the first stop switch 42 is operated.
The display of the acquired number display LED78 after the push order instruction information is displayed is "00" (the upper digit and the lower digit display "0"), "* 0" (the upper digit is off (*), and the lower digit is "". 0 ”is displayed),“ ** ”(higher and lower digits are turned off),“ −− ”(both upper and lower digits are lit only in segment G), and the like.

In "Example 2" of FIG. 24, after the push order instruction number is transmitted to the sub control board 80 by the main control board 50, the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 by the operation of the instruction function, and then the effect group. Send the number and the accessory condition device number. After receiving the effect group number and the accessory condition device number, the sub control board 80 notifies the correct answer pressing order.

Further, in "Example 3" of FIG. 25, after the main control board 50 transmits the push order instruction number, the effect group number, and the accessory condition device number, the sub control board 80 sets the correct push order on the image display device 23. At the moment when the reel 31 rotates at a constant speed (or immediately before that), the main control board 50 displays the push order instruction information by the operation of the instruction function. In Examples 1 and 2 described above, the operation of the instruction function (display of the push order instruction information) by the main control board 50 is performed at an earlier timing than the notification of the correct answer push order by the sub control board 80. .. On the other hand, in Example 3, the notification of the correct answer pressing order by the sub control board 80 is performed at an earlier timing than the operation of the instruction function (display of the pressing order instruction information) by the main control board 50.

In "Example 4" of FIG. 25, the operation of the instruction function (display of the push order instruction information) by the main control board 50 and the notification of the correct answer push order by the sub control board 80 are performed at substantially the same timing. .. When controlling in this way, for example, the instruction function is activated after "N" ms elapses after the push order instruction number or the accessory condition device number is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80 (push order instruction). Information display is started), and the sub-control board 80 is controlled to start notification of the correct answer pressing order after "N" ms has elapsed after receiving the pressing order instruction number or the accessory condition device number. Can be mentioned.

Although four examples are shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, it is preferable that the instruction function is operated (display of push order instruction information) after the start switch 41 is operated until the reel 31 rotates at a constant speed. .. Further, it is preferable that the push order notification is performed by the sub control board 80 side after the instruction function is operated by the main control board 50 side. By setting in this way, when an erroneous push order instruction number is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80, or when the sub control board 80 notifies a push order different from the received push order instruction number. Even in this case, since the push order instruction information is already displayed on the main control board 80, the player may notice an error in the notification by the sub control board 80, and the player may suffer a disadvantage. Absent.
Further, the operation of the instruction function (display of the push order instruction information) by the main control board 50 side is performed until the winning determination, but it may be until the third reel 31 is stopped.

Subsequently, a case where the operation of the instruction function (display of the push order instruction information) and the notification of the correct answer push order will be described more specifically. FIG. 26 is a diagram for explaining the flow of the game (flow from top to bottom in the figure), the display of the acquired number display LED 78, and the notification example of the image display device 23. The example of FIG. 26 is the timing corresponding to “Example 1” of FIG. 24.

In the instruction function operation game in the advantageous section, first, when the start switch 41 is operated, the main control board 50 activates the instruction function and displays the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78. In the example of FIG. 26, an example in which the small winning combination B1 is won is shown. Therefore, the acquired number display LED 78 displays the push order instruction information corresponding to the push order instruction number “A1”, that is, “= 1”.
Then, before the reel 31 reaches the constant speed rotation, the image display device 23 notifies the correct answer pressing order. In the example of FIG. 26, an example of displaying "1 ○○" is shown.

Next, when the first (first) stop switch 42 is operated and the left stop switch 42 is operated, that is, when the correct answer is pressed, the image display device 23 indicates that the pressed order is correct. Is output (correct answer production). On the other hand, if the answer is incorrect, the image display in the correct push order is deleted.
In the present embodiment, since the correct answer / incorrect answer is determined by the operation of the first stop switch 42, the notification (image display) regarding the correct answer pressing order is terminated when the first stop switch 42 is operated. In the case of six options, the correct answer pressing order may be continuously notified until the second stop switch 42 is operated or the third stop switch 42 is operated.

Further, in the example of FIG. 26, the operation of the instruction function (display of the push order instruction information) continues to be displayed until the winning determination is made (the same applies to the example 1 of FIG. 24). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation of the instruction function (display of the acquired number display LED 78) may be terminated in the same manner as the notification of the correct answer pressing order by the image display device 23, for example, when the incorrect answer pressing order is reached. .. Further, as in the present embodiment, when the correct answer pressing order is three choices, an instruction is given when the first stop switch 42 is operated (even if the first stop switch 42 is operated in the correct answer pressing order). The operation of the function may be terminated.

However, it is desirable to end the operation of the instruction function after stopping the notification by the image display device 23. This is to prevent the push order notification from being performed on the sub control board 80 side even though the instruction function is not activated on the main control board 50 side. However, of course, the operation of the instruction function may be terminated at the same time as the end of the notification by the image display device 23, or the operation of the instruction function may be terminated before the end of the notification by the image display device 23.

Of course, even if the pressing order is incorrect, the image display device 23 may continue to notify the correct pressing order.
However, if the push order notification by the image display device 23 is stopped when the push order is incorrect, it is possible to switch to another effect.

When all reels 31 are stopped, a winning determination is made. Here, when the small winning combination 01 wins and 9 medals are paid out, the display of the acquired number display LED78 indicates that 9 medals have been paid out from the push order instruction information display "= 1". It changes to the indicated "09". If one winning combination is won due to a mistake in the pushing order or the like, "01" is displayed, and if the combination is missed, "00" (or "**") is displayed. From the display of the push order instruction information "= 1" to the display of the number of medals to be paid out "09", "= 1" → "00" (in order to reset the display once, "00" is displayed. ) → "09" may be displayed.

Alternatively, "= 1"->"**" (in order to reset the display once, the upper and lower digits are turned off)->"09" may be displayed.
Further, when the player operates the bet switch 40 or cares for the medal and the medal is bet, the displayed content is changed to "00" in order to clear the content of the acquired number displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. (It may be "**").

In FIG. 1, the management information control means 72 is a means for controlling (storage, calculation, display, etc.) the management information displayed on the management information display LED 74.
In the present embodiment, the information to be displayed on the management information display LED 74 is
(1) Advantageous section ratio (cumulative)
(2) Continuous character ratio (6000 games (15 sets total))
(3) Character ratio (6000 games (15 sets total))
(4) Continuous character ratio (cumulative)
(5) Character ratio (cumulative)
(See FIG. 38, which will be described later).

First, the "advantageous section ratio (stay ratio of the advantageous section)" is the ratio of the advantageous section to the total gaming section (normal section + waiting section + advantageous section) (staying in the advantageous section with respect to the total gaming section). ). For example, in the game section with the number of games of "10000", when the number of games of the advantageous section is "7000", the ratio of the advantageous section is "70 (%)".
Further, in the present embodiment, one set is defined as "400" number of games. Then, the total of 15 sets, that is, the number of "6000" games is set as the "total", and each ratio in the number of "6000" games is calculated.

Furthermore, the "cumulative" refers to the sum of the numerical values that have been continuously counted up to that point, and in the present embodiment, the total number of games is counted for the purpose of at least "175,000" games. When the cumulative total is less than the number of "175000" games, the cumulative value is displayed by, for example, a blinking display, and when the total number of games is "175000" or more, the cumulative value is displayed by, for example, a lighting display. The cumulative total continues to be added until the value (upper limit value) memorable at the predetermined address of the RWM 53 is reached even after the number of games played is "175000" or more.

The "continuous accessory ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of medals acquired when the first-class special accessory (RB) is activated to the total number of medals acquired. Therefore, in the present embodiment, "refers to the number of medals acquired during 1BB operation with respect to the total number of medals acquired.
For example, when the number of medals acquired in the number of "6000" games is "2000", and the number of medals acquired when the "Type 1 Special Character (RB)" is activated is "500", the "continuous combination" The object ratio (6000 games) is "25 (%)".

Further, the "role ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of medals acquired when the character is activated to the total number of medals acquired. Here, the "accessory" means, in addition to the above-mentioned first-class special accessory, the second-class special accessory (CB), 2BB (second-class accessory continuous operation device, CB continuously operates), SB. (Single bonus) is included.
Further, in the present embodiment, since CB, 2BB, and SB are not provided, the accessory ratio is the same as the continuous accessory ratio.

27 to 31 (FIG. 31 shows a modification of FIG. 29) are diagrams showing a part of the storage area of the RWM 53 controlled by the management information control means 72. In the figure, the four-digit numerical value starting with "F" indicates the address of RWM53. A 1-byte (8-bit) data buffer (storage area) is provided for each address.

First, FIG. 27 shows a buffer that stores data about advantageous intervals. As information on the advantageous section, it has three storage areas of a value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section, a total number of games played, and a ratio of the advantageous section. The storage area of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is 4 bytes ("F004" to "F001"), and the storage area of the total number of games is 3 bytes ("F007" to "F005"). The storage area of is 1 byte (“F008”).

In the present embodiment, the total number of games is updated so that the value of the total number of games is "+1" each time one game is digested.
On the other hand, during the advantageous section, the value obtained by multiplying the value of the number of advantageous section games by 100 (referred to as "value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games") is added every time one game is digested. Therefore, a storage area of 3 bytes is provided for the total number of games played, and a storage area of 4 bytes is provided for the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section.

In the present embodiment, it is an object to store at least "175,000" times or more as the total number of games played. This is to display the advantageous section ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, and the bonus ratio when the total number of games is "175,000" or more.
Here, since "175000 (D)" has "18" digits in binary, it can be stored in 3 bytes of "24" digits.

Further, assuming that all of the total number of games "175000 (D)" are advantageous sections, the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is "175000 x 100" (D), and this value is "25 digits" in binary. Therefore, 3 bytes of "24" digit is not enough, but 4 bytes of "32" digit can be stored.
For the above reasons, the storage area for the total number of games is 3 bytes, and the storage area for the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is 4 bytes.

Regarding the total number of games, "1" is added for each game, but the total number of games is not limited to this, and a numerical value other than "1" (value corresponding to the total number of games) is added. May be good.
On the other hand, since the advantageous section ratio is "100 (D)" at the maximum value, the value is "7" digits in binary, so that it can be stored with a storage capacity of 1 byte.

The total number of games is continuously updated for each game and the number of games, and when the storage area of 3 bytes reaches the upper limit value (3 bytes full, that is, "FFFFFF (H)", about 16.78 million in decimal number), that The count ends at that point, and the number of games is not updated from the next game.
As for the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games, "+100" is added for each game during the advantageous section, but even if it is assumed that all the games are in the advantageous section, the value of the total number of games becomes 3 bytes full. Can be counted up to. Then, when the counting of the total number of games is completed, the counting of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is also completed.

The advantageous section ratio is a value calculated by "value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games / total number of games played" (as will be described later, subtraction is actually performed and division is not performed). Since the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is a value obtained by multiplying the number of advantageous section games by 100, the ratio itself can be calculated by the above calculation. Since the main CPU 55 of the present embodiment uses an assembler, cannot handle the decimal point, and cannot perform division using a value exceeding 2 bytes, the above calculation method is adopted. Allows calculation by.
In addition, as the advantageous section ratio, an integer is stored in this embodiment, and the fractional part is rounded down. For example, when the total number of games is "1100 (D)" and the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is "56000 (D)", the advantageous section ratio is "50 (D)", and "F008" is "F008". "0010010 (B)" is stored.

Further, the advantageous section ratio can be updated every game, but for example, when there is a request to display the advantageous section ratio, the advantageous section ratio is calculated from the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games and the total number of games. It may be stored in "F008". Then, the numerical value of the decimal number based on the value stored in "F008" is displayed as the advantageous section ratio.

FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a buffer for storing data regarding the total number of payouts. When a medal is paid out by winning a small winning combination, the value stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM53 is updated.
As shown in FIG. 28, the ring buffer is provided with 15 storage areas (01 sets to 15 sets) composed of 2-byte data (for example, “F012 (upper digit)” and “F011 (lower digit)”).
Then, in each 2-byte data, the number of payouts during 400 games is stored. For example, when a 9-card combination wins and 9 cards are paid out, "9 (D)" is added to the total number of payouts.
Here, in the slot machine according to the rules, the maximum number of payouts in one game is set to "15" or less, and assuming that there are 15 payouts in each game, "6000" in 400 games. It becomes. Since "6000 (D)" has 13 digits in binary, it can be stored in 2 bytes (16 digits).

Further, from the first game to the 400th game, when a payout is made, the number of payouts is stored in the 01st set (“F012” and “F011”). From the next 401st game to the 800th game, the number of payouts is stored in the 02nd set ("F014" and "F013").
In this way, 400 games are set as one set, and the values are stored in different buffers for each set.

In addition, a storage area (3 bytes) for the total number of payouts of 15 sets (6000 games) is provided (“F031” to “F02F” in FIG. 28). This storage area is for storing 15 sets, that is, the total number of payouts during 6000 games.
Assuming that 15 cards have been paid out in all 6000 games, it is necessary to store up to the value of "90000 (D)", but since "90000 (D)" is 17 digits in binary, it is necessary to store it. It can be stored in 3 bytes (24 digits).

For example, up to the first 15th set, the total number of payouts for the number of games less than 6000 games is stored in "F031" to "F02F".
Then, when the 6000th game is reached, the total number of payouts for the total of 15 sets (6000 games) is also stored because the number of payouts for 400 games is stored in all the buffers of the 01st to 15th sets (2 bytes each). In addition, it becomes the total value for 6000 games.
Next, when the game shifts to the 6001 game, the 2-byte data (“F012” and “F011”) of the 01st set is cleared, and the total number of payouts from the 6001 game to the 6400 game is stored in this buffer. I will go. From the 6000th game to the 6399th game, the total number of payouts (3 byte data) of the total of 15 sets is maintained unchanged.

Then, in the 6400th game, when the addition to the 2-byte data of the 01st set is completed, the total number of payouts for the 15 sets is calculated (adding each 2-byte data from the 01st set to the 15th set). The total number of payouts for the calculated 15 sets is updated.
Similarly to the above, after the 6401 game, when the game shifts to the 6401 game, the 2-byte data ("F014" and "F013") of the 02nd set is cleared, and the 6401 game to the 6800 game are stored in this buffer. Memorize the total number of payouts up to.
The total number of payouts for 15 sets is updated every 400 games by the above method, but when all 15 sets are replaced with new data, the total number of payouts for 15 sets is calculated. You may update to that value.

The total number of payouts (cumulative) (“F034” to “F032”) is a 3-byte storage area for storing the cumulative number of payouts. The cumulative number of payouts is calculated in order to calculate each ratio (continuous accessory operation ratio, etc., which will be described later) when the number of games is 175,000 or more. However, the cumulative number of payouts continues to be stored even after 175,000 games have passed, and the update ends when the storage capacity of the three bytes reaches the upper limit (3 bytes full).
Assuming that 15 medals are paid out for each game of 175,000 times, the number of medals is 22 digits in binary, so it can be stored with a storage capacity of 3 bytes.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a buffer for storing data regarding the number of payouts related to continuous accessories in RWM53.
As shown in FIG. 29, the 01st set includes a ring buffer provided with 15 storage areas composed of "F043 (highest digit)" to "F041 (lowest digit)"). ..

Then, in each of the 3-byte data, a value obtained by multiplying the number of medals paid out when the continuous accessory is operated by 100 (referred to as "value corresponding to the number of payouts") is stored. For example, when 10 cards are won and 10 cards are paid out during continuous bonus operation, the value corresponding to the number of cards to be paid out is "+1000".
It should be noted that the reason why the value multiplied by 100 is stored instead of the value of the number of payouts itself is the same as the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games, and when calculating the continuous accessory ratio described later, the ratio is an integer. This is so that it can be calculated.

Further, each 3-byte data stores a value corresponding to the number of payouts when the continuous accessory is operated during 400 games. Specifically, from the first game to the 400th game, when there is a payout number when the continuous accessory is operated, the value corresponding to the payout number is stored in the 01st set ("F043" to "F041"). To do. From the next 401st game to the 800th game, the value corresponding to the number of payouts is stored in the 02nd set ("F046" to "F044").
In this way, 400 games are set as one set, and the values are stored in different buffers for each set.
Assuming that 15 medals are paid out for each game in 400 games in a row, the value corresponding to the number of payouts is "600,000 (D)", which is 20 digits in binary, so 3 bytes. Can be memorized by.

In addition, a storage area (3 bytes) corresponding to the number of payouts when the continuous accessory is operated for a total of 15 sets (6000 games) is provided (“F070” to “F06E”). This storage area is a storage area for storing 15 sets, that is, a value corresponding to the number of payouts between 6000 games.
Assuming that 15 medals are paid out in each game in 6000 games, the value corresponding to the number of payouts is "90000 (D)", which is 24 digits in binary, so it is 3 bytes. It is memorable.

For example, up to the first 15th set, "F070" to "F06E" store the value corresponding to the number of payouts when the continuous accessory is operated in the number of games less than 6000 games. Then, when the 6000th game is reached, the value corresponding to the number of payouts between the 400 games is stored in all the buffers of the 01st set to the 15th set (3 bytes each). In addition, the total number of payouts for 15 sets (6000 games) when the continuous accessory is activated is the total value for 6000 games.
Then, when the game shifts to the 6001 game, the 3-byte data ("F043" to "F041") of the 01st set is cleared, and the number of payouts in this buffer when the continuous characters from the 6001 game to the 6400 game are operated. Store the corresponding value. From the 6000th game to the 6399th game, the value corresponding to the number of payouts when the continuous accessory is operated, which is the total of 15 sets, is maintained unchanged.

Then, in the 6400th game, when the 3-byte data of the 01st set is confirmed, the total number of payouts corresponding to the continuous accessory operation for 15 sets is calculated (each 3-byte data from the 01st set to the 15th set is calculated. (Addition), the calculated value corresponding to the number of payouts when the continuous accessory is activated is updated.

Similarly to the above, after the 6401 game, when the game shifts to the 6401 game, the 3-byte data ("F046" to "F044") of the 02nd set is cleared, and the 6401 game to the 6800 game are stored in this buffer. Until, the 3 byte data of the 02nd set is updated.
In the above method, the value corresponding to the number of continuous payouts for 15 sets when the bonus is activated is updated every 400 games, but when all 15 sets are replaced with new data, the total of 15 sets is continuous. The value corresponding to the number of payouts when the accessory is activated may be calculated and updated.

The cumulative number of continuous bonus payouts (“F074” to “F071”) is a storage area for storing the cumulative total of the continuous payouts when the bonuses are operating, and the cumulative number of payouts is calculated. Is for calculating the continuous accessory operation ratio when the number of games is 175,000 or more. However, the cumulative value corresponding to the number of payouts when the continuous accessory is operated continues to be stored even after 175,000 games have passed, and the update ends when the storage capacity of 4 bytes reaches the upper limit value (4 bytes full).
Assuming that 15 medals are continuously paid out for each game, the game "1500 (D)" is continuously added, so that up to about 2.86 million games can be stored with 4 bytes.

In addition, the continuous accessory operation ratio (6000 games) (“F075”) is the value corresponding to the number of continuous accessories paid out during continuous operation of 6000 games (“F070” to “F06E”) / the total number of payouts of 6000 games (FIG. 28). Among them, it is a buffer that stores the values of "F031" to "F02F").

In addition, the continuous accessory operation ratio (cumulative) (“F076”) is the “cumulative value corresponding to the number of continuous accessories paid out (“F074” to “F071”) / cumulative total number of payouts (“F034” in FIG. It is a buffer that stores the values of "to" F032 ").
Since the above ratio stores up to the maximum value "100 (D)" in decimal, it can be stored in 1 byte.
The continuous accessory operation ratio (6000 games) and the continuous accessory operation ratio (cumulative) can be updated every game, but for example, when there is a request to display these ratios, a calculation is performed. , The calculation result may be stored in each storage area (“F075” or “F076”), and the value may be displayed.

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a buffer for storing data regarding the number of payouts of the accessory in the RWM53. As is clear from the comparison between FIGS. 30 and 29, a buffer for storing the payout number corresponding value of the accessory is provided as well as a buffer for storing the payout number corresponding value of the continuous accessory. The buffer that stores the value corresponding to the number of payouts of the accessory has the same configuration as the buffer that stores the value corresponding to the number of payouts of the continuous accessory.

That is, for every 400 games, the storage area for 15 sets that can store 3 byte data each as the value corresponding to the number of payouts when the bonus is activated, and the value corresponding to the total number of payouts when the bonus is activated for 6000 games (15 sets). It is provided with a 3-byte buffer for storing and a 4-byte buffer for storing the value corresponding to the total number of payouts when the accessory is activated. Further, as a buffer (1 byte) for storing the accessory operation ratio, there are two types, one for 6000 games and the other for cumulative use.
Since the storage method in each of these buffers is the same as when the continuous accessory is operated, the description thereof will be omitted.

Since the continuous accessory corresponds to 1BB (including RB) of the present embodiment, if a medal is paid out during the operation of 1BB, it is stored in the value corresponding to the number of continuous accessories paid out when the continuous accessory is operated.
Further, when the medals are paid out during the operation of all the bonuses including the continuous bonus, the bonus is stored in the value corresponding to the number of payouts when the bonus is activated as shown in FIG.
Here, in the present embodiment, only 1BB (and RB), which is a continuous accessory, is provided as the accessory. Therefore, in such a case, the value stored in the buffer shown in FIG. 29 and FIG. 30 The value stored in the buffer shown in is the same value.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a modified example of the ring buffer, and in this example, a modified example of FIG. 29 is shown.
In FIG. 29, a ring buffer composed of 3 bytes for each of the 01st to 15th sets was provided, and the total value of the 15 sets was stored.
On the other hand, in the example of FIG. 31, the point of calculating the total value of 15 sets is the same as that of FIG. 29, but 16 sets are provided as the ring buffer.

In FIG. 31, the same as in FIG. 29, the value corresponding to the number of payouts is stored in each of 3 bytes of 01 set to 15 sets from the first game to the 6000th game.
Here, when it is desired to calculate the value corresponding to the total number of payouts from the first game to the 6000th game, each 3-byte data from 01 set to 15 sets is added and calculated.

Next, the value corresponding to the number of payouts from the 6001st game to the 6400th game is stored in the 16th set of 3-byte buffers (“F070” to “F06E”).
Then, when it comes to the 6401th game, the 3-byte data ("F043" to "F041") of the 01st set is cleared, and the value corresponding to the number of payouts from the 6401th game to the 6800th game is converted into the 3-byte data of the 01 set. I will remember.

When calculating the total payout number corresponding value of 6000 games (15 sets) between the 6401th game to the 6800th game, each 3 byte data of 02 sets to 16 sets is added and calculated.
Further, when the 6800th game is reached, the total payout number corresponding value of the 6000 games (15 sets) is calculated by adding 3 byte data of each of 1 set to 15 sets.
In this way, the 3-byte buffer of any one of the 16 sets is used as the 3-byte buffer currently being updated, and the other 15 sets of 3-byte buffers are used to calculate the value corresponding to the total number of payouts of the 15 sets. Used when doing.

The data stored in the storage area of the RWM 53 shown in FIGS. 27 to 30 is not initialized only by turning on / off the power switch 11, and the data is maintained.
Further, even when the predetermined storage area is initialized (when the RAM is cleared) when the setting is changed, the storage area of the RWM 53 shown in FIGS. 27 to 30 is an exception to the initialization, and the data is maintained without being initialized. To. Here, in order to shift to the setting change mode, it is based on turning on the power switch 11 in the situation where the setting key switch 12 is turned on (rotated 90 degrees to the right) when the power switch 11 is off. Can be migrated. Further, the initialization of the predetermined storage area at the time of changing the setting described above is executed before the set value can be changed (setting change mode) based on the operation of the setting switch 13.

However, when an unrecoverable error occurs, the above data is initialized when the error is recovered. On the other hand, when a recoverable error occurs, the above data is not initialized and is maintained.
Here, the "unrecoverable error" refers to a serious error that cannot be recovered unless the power is turned off and the operation for shifting to the setting change mode described above is performed. For example
1) When the read setting value is not within the range of settings 1 to 6 (setting value abnormality)
2) When a symbol (kicking symbol) that should not be displayed is displayed as a result of determining the stop symbol (symbol combination error)
3) Random number update error determined for each interrupt process,
4) For example, when the power failure / recovery data is not a normal value.

When an irreversible error occurs, the power switch 11 is turned off, the setting key is inserted and rotated 90 degrees clockwise to turn on the setting key switch 12, and then the power switch 11 is turned on. As a result, the predetermined range of the RWM 53 (data of each buffer of FIGS. 27 to 30, set value information, RT information, winning condition device information) is cleared. Then, the set value is set, and if there is no other error, the return process is performed.

On the other hand, the "recoverable error" refers to an error that can be recovered without turning on / off the power switch 11. For example, a medal jam error, a medal retention error, a medal illegal passage error, an abnormality of the passage sensor 43a, an abnormality of the insertion sensor 44, an abnormality of the payout sensor 37, an abnormality of the medal insertion error, and the like can be mentioned.
When a recoverable error occurs, the error content is displayed and the main process is stopped. However, when the hall clerk executes the error cancellation operation (removes the error cause) and operates the reset switch 14, is the error cleared? When it is determined whether or not the error has been cleared, the process is restarted.

Next, the update processing of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games and the total number of games will be described. In the flowcharts of FIGS. 32 to 37 below, the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is abbreviated as the “value corresponding to the advantageous section”.
FIG. 32 is an example of updating the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games and the total number of games using the register. Further, FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a specific example 1 of the portion surrounded by the dotted line in FIG. 32, FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the specific example 2 of the portion surrounded by the dotted line, and FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example 3 of a part. Further, FIG. 36 is an example of updating the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games and the total number of games without using the register.

FIG. 32 is executed at each game, for example, at the end of the game. Further, in the method using registers, in the chip of the present embodiment, A, B, C, D, E, H, and L registers (7 registers) can be used at the time of calculation. In particular, since the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games ("F004" to "F001") is 4 bytes and the total number of games ("F007" to "F005") is 3 bytes, the total is 7 bytes and can be used. The number of registers and the number of bytes match.

In FIG. 32, in step S101, the upper 1 byte (data of “F007” in FIG. 27) of the total number of games played is set in the A register. In the next step S102, the lower 2 bytes of the total number of games played (data of "F006" and "F005" in FIG. 27) are set in the DE register.
Further, in step S103, the upper 2 bytes (data of "F004" and "F003" in FIG. 27) corresponding to the number of advantageous section games are set in the BC register. In the next step S104, the lower 2 bytes (data of "F002" and "F001" in FIG. 27) corresponding to the number of advantageous section games are set in the HL register.

In step S105, "1" is added to the lower 2-byte register of the total number of games played, that is, the DE register value in this example. In the next step S106, it is determined whether or not the lower 2 bytes of the total number of games have overflowed due to the addition of "1" in step S105. For example, when the lower 2 bytes of data are "FFFF (H)" before the start of this flowchart, digit overflow occurs due to the addition of "1" in step S105 (flag register (F register) built in the main CPU 55). ) Carry flag is "1"). When it is determined that the digit overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step S107, and when it is determined that the digit overflow does not occur (carry flag ≠ “1”), the process proceeds to step S109. Since it is determined in step S106 whether or not the digit overflow has occurred after adding "1" in step S105, the DE register value when the digit overflow occurs at the time of step S106 is "0". ".
In the present embodiment, the "0" bit of the F register (flag register) is set as the carry flag. The carry flag is a flag that becomes "1" when a carry occurs or a carry (also referred to as a carry overflow) occurs due to an operation using a register.

In step S107, "1" is added to the upper 1-byte register of the total number of games played, that is, the A register value in this example. In the next step S108, it is determined whether or not the total number of games has reached the upper limit. Here, the "upper limit" means the upper limit of the count. Since the total number of games played in this embodiment is counted in 3 bytes, when the total number of games is 3 bytes, specifically when the value is "FFFFFF (H)", no further addition is possible. , Judge that the upper limit has been reached. After adding "1" to the A register value in step S107, it is determined that the upper limit has been reached when the A register value actually overflows (when the carry flag = "1"). is there. It can also be rephrased as when the A register value becomes "0" (when the zero flag = "1"). When it is determined that the upper limit has been reached, the process according to this flowchart is terminated, and when it is determined that the upper limit has not been reached, the process proceeds to step S109.

Therefore, when the total number of games of the present embodiment is 3 bytes full, and when the total number of games is about 16.78 million in decimal, the total number of games is not added any more. However, even when the 3 bytes are full, the flow of FIG. 32 is executed every game, but each game is determined to be "Yes" in step S108, and this flowchart ends.

Proceeding from step S106 or step S108 to step S109, it is determined whether or not the game is in the advantageous section this time. By providing an advantageous section flag that is turned on during the advantageous section and determining whether the advantageous section flag is on / off, it is possible to determine whether or not the game is an advantageous section this time. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, it is possible to determine whether or not the segment data of the digit 2 is in the advantageous section by determining whether or not the eighth bit is "1". Is.
If it is determined in step S109 that the advantageous section is in progress, the process proceeds to step S110, and if it is determined that the advantageous section is not in progress, the value corresponding to the number of games in the advantageous section is not updated and the process proceeds to step S114.

In step S110, "100 (D)" is added to the lower 2-byte register value of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games, that is, the HL register value in this example. Then, the process proceeds to step S111, and it is determined whether or not the digit overflow has occurred. In the present embodiment, since "100 (D)" is added in each advantageous section, it is "FFDC (H) (65500 (D))" and "100 (D)" that the digit overflow occurs in 2 bytes. ) ”Is added to give“ 0040 (H) (65600 (D)) ”. When it is determined that the digit overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step S112, and when it is determined that the digit overflow has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S113.

In step S112, "1" is added to the upper 2-byte register of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games, that is, the BC register in this example. Then, the process proceeds to step S113, and the updated BC register value and HL register value are written in "F004" to "F001" in FIG. 27. As a result, the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games (RWM53) is updated. Further, in the next step S114, the updated A register value and DE register value are written in "F007" to "F005" in FIG. 27. As a result, the total number of games played (RWM53) is updated. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

In the flowchart of FIG. 32, the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games does not reach 4 bytes full before the total number of games reaches 3 bytes full. As described above, the total number of games can be counted as about 16.78 million, but even if the total number of games is assumed to be an advantageous section and the value of about 16.78 million is multiplied by 100, This is because it does not reach 4 bytes full. Therefore, even if "1" is added to the upper 2-byte register value of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games in step S112, correct arithmetic processing can be realized without determining whether or not digit overflow has occurred. At the same time, it becomes possible to realize simplification of arithmetic processing.

Further, in the flowchart of FIG. 32, each data of the RWM 53 is set (copied) in the register and the calculation is executed. When it is determined in step S108 that the total number of games has reached the upper limit, the total number of games is set. The process according to this flowchart ends without returning the set register value to RWM53. Therefore, the total number of games stored in the RWM53, that is, the 3-byte data stored in the "F007" to "F005" of the RWM53 remains "FFFFFF (H)", and the RWM53 before and after the start of this flowchart. There is no change in the total number of games played.

Next, in FIG. 32, a specific example of the processing of steps S109 to S114 will be described.
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a specific example 1 of the steps during this period. In FIG. 33, steps S109 to S112 are the same as in FIG. 32. In FIG. 33, when “No” is determined in step S109, the process proceeds to step S123.

When the process proceeds to step S121 after step S112, the value of the upper two bytes of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is updated. Specifically, the value of the BC register is written in "F004" and "F003" in FIG. 27. In the next step S122, the value of the lower two bytes of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is updated. Specifically, the value of the HL register is written in "F002" and "F001" in FIG. 27.
Next, when the process proceeds to step S123, the total number of games is updated for 3 bytes at a time. Specifically, the A register value and the DE register value are written in "F007", "F006", and "F005" in FIG. 27, respectively.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a specific example 2 of steps S109 to S114 of FIG. In FIG. 34, steps S109 to S112 are the same as in FIG. 32. In FIG. 33, when “No” is determined in step S109, the process proceeds to step S123.
When the process proceeds to step S131 after step S112, the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is updated in a batch for 4 bytes. Specifically, the BC register value and the HL register value are written in "F004", "F003", "F002", and "F001" in FIG. 27, respectively. Then, when the process proceeds to step S123, the total number of games is updated for 3 bytes at a time, as in the case of Specific Example 1.

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a specific example 3 of steps S109 to S114 of FIG. In FIG. 35, when “No” is determined in step S109, the process proceeds to step S141.
Each step in FIG. 35 is the same as in FIG. 34. In FIG. 35, the difference from FIG. 34 is that even when it is determined in step S109 that the player is not in the advantageous section, the process proceeds to step S131 and the value corresponding to the number of games in the advantageous section is updated. That is, in this case, the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is not added by "100 (D)", but is based on the BC register value and the HL register value set in steps S103 and S104 in FIG. , In FIG. 27, write in "F004", "F003", "F002", and "F001". In this case, the same value as in the previous game is written again.

The above examples of FIGS. 32 to 35 are examples of updating the total number of games and the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games via the register (using).
On the other hand, FIG. 36 is an example of updating the total number of games and the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games without going through the register in principle.
In FIG. 36, in step S201, “1” is added to the lower 2 bytes of the total number of games played. Specifically, in FIG. 27, "1" is added to the data of "F006" and "F005".

In the next step S202, it is determined whether or not an overflow has occurred in the addition in step S201. That is, by adding "1" to the data of "F006" and "F005", it is determined whether or not the carry flag has become "1". It should be noted that the determination may be made based on whether or not the data of "F006" and "F005" is "0000 (H)". When it is determined that the digit overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step S203, and when it is determined that the digit overflow has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S207.

In step S203, "1" is added to the upper 1 byte of the total number of games played. Specifically, in FIG. 27, "1" is added to the data of "F007". In the next step S204, it is determined whether or not the total number of games has reached the upper limit. The judgment here is that the addition of "1" in step S203 causes an overflow of digits in "F007", determines whether or not the carry flag has become "1", and the carry flag has become "1". When it is, it is judged that the upper limit has been reached. It should be noted that it may be determined whether or not the data of "F007" is "0 (H)", and when it is "0 (H)", it may be determined that the upper limit has been reached. When it is determined that the upper limit has been reached, the process proceeds to step S205, and when it is determined that the upper limit has not been reached, the process proceeds to step S207.

In step S205, "1" is subtracted from the upper 1 byte of the total number of games played. When the process proceeds to step S205, an overflow occurs in the upper 1 byte in the addition of step S203, which is "0 (H)". Therefore, by subtracting "1" from this value, step S203 is performed. The data before adding "1", that is, "FF (H)" is restored.
Next, the process proceeds to step S206, and "1" is subtracted for the lower 2 bytes of the total number of games played. As a result, the values of "F006" and "F005" become "FFFF (H)". Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

On the other hand, when proceeding from step S202 or step S204 to step S207, it is determined whether or not the game is in the advantageous section this time. This determination is the same as in step S109 of FIG. Then, when it is determined that the player is not in the advantageous section, it is not necessary to update the value corresponding to the number of games in the advantageous section, so that the process according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the section is in the advantageous section, the process proceeds to step S208. In step S208, "100 (D)" is added to the lower two bytes of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games, that is, "F002" and "F001" in FIG. 27. Here, since the assembler cannot directly add the value of "100 (D)" to the RWM53, first, the data of "F002" and "F001" are stored in the HL register. Then, the data of "F002" and "F001" is updated by storing the result of adding the value of "100 (D)" to the HL register in "F002" and "F001".

In the next step S209, in the calculation of step S208, it is determined whether or not an overflow has occurred. Here, it is determined whether or not the carry flag is "1", and when the carry flag is "1", it is determined that an overflow has occurred.

When it is determined in step S209 that the digit overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step S210, and when it is determined that the digit overflow has not occurred, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. In step S210, "1" is added to the upper two bytes of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games, that is, "F004" and "F003" in FIG. 27. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

Next, the calculation process of the advantageous section ratio will be described.
In the present embodiment, the total number of games and the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games are stored. Therefore, in order to calculate the advantageous section ratio, simply "value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games ÷ total number of games" is used. Can be calculated. However, in the slot machine 10, a chip that satisfies the rule can only perform an operation with 2 bytes, and cannot perform division of a numerical value of 2 bytes or more. Therefore, the ratio is calculated by the subtraction shown below.

Specifically, when the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games = x and the total number of games = y, “x ÷ y” can be calculated by repeating the following subtraction.
xy = a (> 0)
a-y = b (> 0)
by = c (> 0)
cy = d (<0)
In this way, as a result of repeating the subtraction of the total number of games y, the number of times that "> 0 (greater than" 0 ")" is "3", so the quotient of "x ÷ y" is "3". It can be calculated that there is. Then, in the present embodiment, since the part after the decimal point is rounded down, the advantageous section ratio is calculated as "3" in the above example.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the calculation processing of the advantageous section ratio.
First, in step S301, the data of RWM53 is acquired in the register. In the same manner as above, seven A, B, C, D, E, H, and L registers are used.
In this step S301, each data of “F001” to “F007” shown in FIG. 27 is stored in the register. Specifically, it is as follows.
A register: Stores the data of "F007" D register: Stores the data of "F006" E register: Stores the data of "F005" B register: Stores the data of "F004" C register: Stores the data of "F003" H register: Stores the data of "F002" L register: Stores the data of "F001"

Next, the process proceeds to step S302, and the advantageous section ratio (RWM53) is initialized. This process clears (sets to "0") the data stored in "F008" in FIG. 27.
Then, the process proceeds to step S303, and the lower byte is subtracted. In this process, the data stored in the DE register (lower 2 bytes of the total number of games) is subtracted from the data stored in the HL register (lower 2 bytes of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games), and the calculation result is obtained. Store in the HL register.

Next, the process proceeds to step S304, and it is determined whether or not a carry has occurred. When the carry flag is not set (when the carry flag is ≠ "1") as a result of the operation in step S303 (the result of subtracting the DE register value from the HL register value), it is determined as "No".
When it is determined that the carry flag is set (there is a carry flag), the process proceeds to step S305, and when it is determined that there is no carry flag, the process proceeds to step S307.

In step S305, it is determined whether or not the upper 2 bytes of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games, that is, the BC register value is “0”. When it is "0", the subsequent subtraction cannot be performed, so the process according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value is not "0", the process proceeds to step S306.
In step S306, "1" is subtracted from the upper byte of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games. Specifically, "1" is subtracted from the BC register value, and the calculation result is stored in the BC register.

In the next step S307, the high-order byte is subtracted. Specifically, the A register value (the upper 1 byte of the total number of games) is subtracted from the BC register value (the upper 2 bytes of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games), and the calculation result is stored in the BC register. Then, the process proceeds to step S308, and it is determined whether the calculation result in step S307 is less than "0", that is, whether the carry flag is set by the calculation in step S307. When the carry flag is set, it is determined as "Yes" in step S308, and no further subtraction is possible, so the process according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined as "No" in step S308, the process proceeds to step S309.
In step S309, the HL register value is stored in the stack area (a part of the storage area of the RWM 53).

In the next step S310, the data (advantageous section ratio) stored in "F008" is stored in the HL register, and "1" is added to the data stored in the address (F008) indicated by the HL register. Then, the process proceeds to step S311, and the data stored in the stack area in step S309 is stored in the HL register. After step S311, the process returns to step S303 and the above process (subtraction) is repeated.
By the above processing, the total number of games is subtracted from the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games, and the advantageous section ratio is added by "1" for each subtraction. Therefore, after the processing of FIG. 37, the advantageous section game count corresponding value stored in "F001" to "F007" and the advantageous section ratio calculated from the total number of games are stored in "F008".
As is clear from the above, the advantageous section ratio is added by "1" each time the processes of steps S303 to S311 in FIG. 37 are executed once. That is, the number of executions (number of repetitions) of steps S303 to S311 is the advantageous section ratio.

In the above, the quotient of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games (value obtained by multiplying the number of advantageous section games by 100) and the total number of games is calculated and used as the advantageous section ratio (%). The same method as this calculation method is used. By (repeating subtraction), the continuous bonus ratio (6000 games (15 sets)), the bonus ratio (6000 games (15 sets)), the continuous bonus ratio (cumulative), and the bonus ratio (cumulative) are calculated. be able to.

Specifically, the value corresponding to the number of payouts when the continuous accessory is activated for 6000 games (15 sets) (“F070” to “F06E” in FIG. 29) and the total number of payouts for 6000 games (15 sets) (in FIG. 28). , "F031" to "F02F"), by repeating the same subtraction as above, the quotient of "value corresponding to the number of payouts when the continuous accessory of 6000 games is activated / the total number of payouts of 6000 games" is calculated. The value is stored in "F075" in FIG. 29 as the continuous accessory operation ratio (6000 games).

Further, from the cumulative total number of payouts when the continuous accessory is activated (“F074” to “F071” in FIG. 29) and the cumulative total number of payouts (“F034” to “F032” in FIG. 28), “ The quotient of "cumulative value corresponding to the total number of payouts when the continuous bonus is operated / total number of payouts in total" is calculated, and the value is stored in "F076" in FIG. 29 as the continuous bonus operation ratio (cumulative).

Similarly, from the value corresponding to the number of payouts when the accessory of 6000 games is activated (“F0B0” to “F0AE” in FIG. 30) and the total number of payouts of 6000 games (“F031” to “F02F” in FIG. 28). , Calculate the quotient of "value corresponding to the number of payouts when the accessory is activated in 6000 games / total number of payouts in 6000 games", and store the value in "F0B5" in FIG. 30 as the accessory operation ratio (6000 games). ..

In addition, from the cumulative number of payouts when the accessory is activated (“F0B4” to “F0B1” in FIG. 30) and the total number of payouts (“F034” to “F032” in FIG. 28), “cumulative total”. Calculate the quotient of "value corresponding to the number of payouts when the accessory is activated / total number of total payouts", and store the value as the accessory operation ratio (cumulative) in "F0B6" in FIG.

FIG. 38 shows the “advantageous section ratio”, the “continuous accessory ratio (6000 games (15 sets))”, the “character ratio (6000 games (15 sets))”, and the “continuous accessory ratio” calculated as described above. It is a figure which shows the display example of "ratio (cumulative)", "combination ratio (cumulative)". These five pieces of information are displayed according to the information type and the numerical value, and are displayed on the management information display LED 74.
The five pieces of information shown in FIG. 38 are examples, and are not limited to these pieces of information. Information other than these may be displayed, or some of the information shown in FIG. 38 may be displayed. Only information may be displayed. Further, the display is not limited to the order shown in FIG. 38, and the display order is arbitrary.

The management information is displayed as described above for the following reasons.
For amusement machines, those that meet the type test stipulated by the Fuei Law are allowed to install a hall. Here, in the type test, the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio when 6000 games are executed do not exceed the predetermined values (70% for the bonus ratio and 60% for the continuous bonus ratio). There are established regulations.
In addition, at the time of the type test, a document stating the average value of the applied game machine's accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio is attached (in the future, the average value will also be stated for the advantageous section ratio. May be required).

In this case, the hall clerk or a third party can easily confirm whether or not the game machine installed in the hall has the same specifications as the conforming game machine (whether or not it is fraudulent). It is desired to.
For example, a game machine that has a numerical value that deviates from the compatible game machine may be different from the compatible game machine. In this case, request the manufacturer to confirm the game machine. Therefore, fraud and the like can be confirmed at an early stage.
Therefore, if a function for calculating and displaying management information is provided as in the present embodiment, it becomes possible to easily and surely confirm whether or not the conforming information is matched.

In the present embodiment, when the front door of the slot machine 10 is opened (the door switch 15 is turned on by this), the setting key is inserted, and the setting key is rotated 90 degrees clockwise, the setting key switch 12 is turned on. .. In this state, so-called setting confirmation is in progress. Therefore, the current set value is displayed on the set value display LED 73. Since the setting is being confirmed differently from the setting being changed, the set value is not changed even if the setting switch 13 is operated.

Then, in the present embodiment, when the setting switch 13 is pressed once during this setting confirmation, the "advantageous section ratio" is displayed in the digits 6 to 9 in FIG. First, the digits 6 and 7 display the information type. In the example of FIG. 38, the advantageous section ratio is displayed as “U7”. Further, in this example, the advantageous section ratio is assumed to be "50 (%)", and "50" is displayed on the digits 7 and 8. Therefore, "U750" is displayed on the management information display LEDs 74 (digits 6 to 9).
When displaying the numerical value of the management information, it is expressed in decimal number.

Next, when the setting switch 13 is pressed again, the "continuous accessory ratio (6000 games (15 sets))" is displayed, and "y6" is displayed as the type of this information. In this example, the ratio is "45". (%) ”Is displayed.
Further, when the setting switch 13 is pressed again, the "role ratio (6000 games (15 sets))" is displayed, and "y7" is displayed as the type of this information. In this example, the ratio is "60 (%)". ) ”Is displayed.

Similarly, when the setting switch 13 is pressed again, the "continuous accessory ratio (cumulative)" is displayed, and "A6" is displayed as the type of this information. In this example, the ratio is "48 (%)". it's shown.
Similarly, when the setting switch 13 is pressed again, the "role ratio (cumulative)" is displayed, and "A7" is displayed as the type of this information. In this example, the ratio is "52 (%)". it's shown.
Further, when the setting switch 13 is pressed again, the display returns to the initial display and the advantageous section "U750" is displayed.
Further, the display of the management information may be turned off when the setting switch 13 is not operated for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds). After the light is turned off, when the setting switch 13 is pressed, the first display, the advantageous section ratio "U750", is displayed.

Further, while the door switch 15 detects that the front door is open, the management information is continuously displayed (each digit 6 to 9 is continuously lit), and the door switch 15 detects that the front door is closed. At that time, the digits 6 to 9 may be turned off.
In this case, when the opening of the front door is detected by the door switch 15, the advantageous section "U750" may be displayed before the setting key switch 12 and the setting switch 13 are turned on, or the door switch 15 may be displayed. When the setting key switch 12 and the setting switch 13 are turned on, the advantageous section "U750" may be displayed without turning on the digits 6 to 9 only when the opening of the front door is detected.

Further, regardless of whether or not the opening of the front door by the door switch 15 is detected, after the power switch 11 is turned on, a predetermined cycle (for example, about every 3 seconds (the number of interrupt processing is every 1500 interrupts). )) May be configured so that the display contents shown in FIG. 38 can be sequentially displayed on the management information display LED 74.
Here, the management information shown in FIG. 38 includes information whose ratio depends on the set value such as the continuous accessory ratio.
On the other hand, it is highly likely that the front door will be opened while the hall is open (when the player can play).
a) An error that occurs when it is determined that the medal in the hopper 35 is empty,
b) An error that occurs when it is determined that medals have accumulated in the medal selector,
c) An error that occurs when it is determined that medals have accumulated in the payout port of the hopper 35,
d) An error that occurs when the medals are full in the hopper 35 (the sub storage that is provided next to the hopper 35 and stores the medals that overflow from the hopper 35 is full) (both can be restored as described above). An error that belongs to an error) and the like.

If a person involved in the hall opens the front door when such an error occurs, the player may be able to see the management information and infer the set value. In order to eliminate such a situation, when at least one of the above errors a) to d) or at least one of the errors a) to d) occurs, the management information display LED 74 does not display the lighting. It is desirable to configure it so that it goes out. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the errors a) to d) described above, and it is possible to configure the management information display LED 74 not to display the lighting even when other errors occur.
In addition, when the above-mentioned non-recoverable error occurs, the credibility of the displayed management information is doubtful, and after the non-recoverable error is cleared, the data that is the basis of the displayed management information is cleared. Therefore, it is desirable not to display it.

In addition, in order to see the management information displayed on the main control board 50, the front door must be opened, and if the front door is opened, a door opening error always occurs, but it is managed by operating the above various switches. You may display the information.

Further, the above information types "U7", "y6", "y7", "A6", and "A7" are examples, and arbitrary display is performed by a two-digit alphabet, a symbol, a numerical value, or a combination thereof. be able to.
Further, in the above example, a numerical example different between the continuous bonus ratio and the bonus ratio is shown, but when only the continuous bonus is provided as in the present embodiment, the continuous bonus ratio and the bonus ratio are the same value. It becomes.

Further, in the case of performing the above display, for example, when the door switch 15 is on, the setting key switch 12 is on, and the setting switch 13 is on, the mode shifts to the management information display mode and "U7 (advantageous section)". Read the segment data to display "ratio)" and display it on digits 6 and 7. Specifically, if "U7" is displayed, the segment data will be "00111110 (B)" and "00100111 (B)".

Further, when displaying the numerical value, for example, if it is an advantageous section ratio, the data of “F008” in FIG. 27 described above is read and converted into segment data. When the advantageous section ratio is "50 (D)", the data stored in "F008" is "00110010". When the value is converted into segment data, it becomes "01101101 (B)" and "00111111 (B)".

Further, when displaying the advantageous section ratio, the total number of games ("F007" to "F005") is read, and it is determined whether or not the total number of games has reached "175000 (D)". When it is determined that the total number of games has not reached "175000" games, the numerical value of the advantageous section ratio is displayed in blinking. On the other hand, when it is determined that the total number of games has reached "175000", the numerical value of the advantageous section ratio is lit and displayed. In this way, the display pattern is different depending on whether or not the total number of games has reached "175,000 games".

Specific examples of blinking display include displaying in a pattern of repeating turning off and turning on at intervals of "0.5 seconds", turning off time of "0.5 seconds", and repeating lighting time of "1 second". Displaying in a pattern can be mentioned. Compared to the case where the extinguishing time and the lighting time are set to the same time, if the lighting time is longer than the extinguishing time, the display time of the management information can be lengthened and the lighting of the hall etc. is dim. Visibility can be improved even under circumstances.
Since the display pattern may be different so that it can be determined whether or not the game has reached the "175000" game, the display of the information type "U7" is not limited to blinking or lighting, for example, "U7"("U7"("" It may be displayed differently from the display (more than 175000” games), for example, “U1” (less than “175000” games). Alternatively, when the game is less than "175000", "U7" may be blinked and displayed, and the numerical value may be lit.

In the same manner as above, when displaying the continuous bonus ratio (6000 games) and the bonus ratio (6000 games), if the total number of games has not reached "6000" games, the continuous bonus ratio and the bonus ratio and the bonus ratio, respectively. The numerical value of the accessory ratio is displayed blinking. On the other hand, when the total number of games has reached "6000", the numerical values of the continuous bonus ratio and the bonus ratio are lit and displayed, respectively.
Therefore, when displaying the continuous bonus ratio (6000 games) and the bonus ratio (6000 games), the value of the total number of games ("F007" to "F005") in FIG. 27 is set in the same manner as above. It is read, it is determined whether or not the game has reached "6000", and the display pattern is changed according to the result.

Similarly, when displaying the continuous bonus ratio (cumulative) and the bonus ratio (cumulative), if the total number of games has not reached "175000", the continuous bonus ratio (cumulative) and the bonus ratio, respectively. The numerical value of the accessory ratio (cumulative) is displayed in blinking. On the other hand, when the total number of games has reached "175000", the numerical values of the continuous bonus ratio (cumulative) and the bonus ratio (cumulative) are lit and displayed, respectively.
Therefore, when displaying the continuous bonus ratio (cumulative) and the bonus ratio (cumulative), the value of the total number of games ("F007" to "F005") in FIG. 27 is read, and the game is set to "175000". It is judged whether or not it has been reached, and the display pattern is changed according to the result.

In particular, the advantageous section ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, and the bonus ratio can be discriminated by displaying whether or not the number of games is 6000 or more and whether or not the number of games is 175,000 or more (different display modes, etc.). , Has the following merits.
For example, based on the currently displayed advantageous section ratio, continuous bonus ratio, and bonus ratio management information, when determining whether or not the game is an illegal game machine, how many games are the management information. By referring to whether or not the value is for, it becomes possible to more accurately determine whether or not the game machine is an illegal game machine.

For example, it is assumed that the design value (average value) of the advantageous section ratio was 55 (%) at the time of applying for the model of the game machine.
At this time, for example, when the advantageous section ratio in 1000 games is 80 (%) and when the advantageous section ratio is 80 (%) in 175,000 games or more, the judgment as to whether or not it is illegal is different. .. It is quite possible that the value of the advantageous section ratio in 1000 games has not yet converged. On the other hand, since the advantageous section ratio in 175,000 games is a value for a sufficient number of games, it is considered that the values have converged. Therefore, it can be determined that the latter is more likely to be fraudulent.

In this way, even if the values are the same, as the number of games increases, the value converges to the design value. Therefore, if the number of games and the value are combined to determine whether or not the game is an illegal game machine, You can make more accurate decisions.
As described above, when the total number of games has not reached the predetermined number of games (6000 games or 175000 games), the blinking display is displayed, and when the predetermined number of games is reached, the lighting display is displayed. On the contrary, when the total number of games has not reached the predetermined number of games, the display may be lit, and when the total number of games has been reached, the display may be blinking.

Further, in the above example, the digits 6 to 9 are mounted on the main control board 50 and the management information display LED 74 is provided. It is possible. With this setting, it is not necessary to separately provide digits 6 to 9, which results in cost reduction.

FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of displaying management information using the storage number display LED 76.
The example of FIG. 39 shows an example of having nine medals as credits. Therefore, at first, the display of the stored number display LED 76 is "09".
Then, even if the front door is opened and the door switch 15 is turned on, the display of the stored number display LED 76 is not changed (because the door open error is displayed by the acquired number display LED 78 described later).

Then, when the setting switch 13 is pressed once, the storage number display LED 76 displays "U7" indicating that it is an advantageous section ratio. Then, when a certain time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed, "50", which is a numerical value of the advantageous section ratio, is displayed. If this state is left unattended, "U7" and "50" are alternately displayed every 2 seconds.

Then, when the setting switch 13 is pressed next time, the storage number display LED 76 displays "y6" indicating that the "continuous accessory ratio (6000 games)". Then, when the above-mentioned fixed time elapses, the numerical value "45" of the "continuous accessory ratio (6000 games)" is displayed. Then, similarly to the above, if this state is left unattended, "y6" and "45" are alternately displayed every 2 seconds, which is repeated.
In the example of FIG. 39, the arrow is shown so as to shift from the display of "50" to the display of "y6", but even if the setting switch 13 is pressed while the display of "U7" is displayed, the display of "y6" is displayed. Of course, (the same is true for other figures).

Further, when the setting switch 13 is pressed while "y6" or "45" is being displayed, the storage number display LED 76 displays "y7" indicating that the "role ratio (6000 games)" is displayed. When the above-mentioned fixed time elapses, the numerical value "60" of the "role ratio (6000 games)" is displayed. Then, in the same manner as described above, if this state is left unattended, "y7" and "60" are alternately displayed every 2 seconds.

Furthermore, when the setting switch 13 is pressed while "y7" or "60" is being displayed, the storage number display LED 76 displays "A6" indicating that it is the "continuous accessory ratio (cumulative)". , When the above-mentioned fixed time elapses, the numerical value "48" of the "continuous accessory ratio (cumulative)" is displayed. Then, similarly to the above, if this state is left unattended, "A6" and "48" are alternately displayed every 2 seconds.
Similarly, when the setting switch 13 is pressed while "A6" or "48" is being displayed, the storage number display LED 76 displays "A7" indicating that it is the "role ratio (cumulative)". , When the above-mentioned fixed time elapses, the numerical value "52" of the "role ratio (cumulative)" is displayed. Then, in the same manner as described above, if this state is left unattended, "A7" and "52" are alternately displayed every 2 seconds.

Further, when the setting switch 13 is further pressed in this state, the display returns to the initial display of the advantageous section ratios “U7” and “50”.
When the front door is closed and the door switch 13 is turned off during the above display, the display switches to the storage number display "09".

FIG. 40 is a diagram showing an example of displaying management information using the acquired number display LED 78.
In the example of FIG. 40, an example in which "09" is displayed as the number of acquisitions is shown.
Then, when the front door is opened and the door switch 15 is turned on, a door open error is detected. As a result, "dE" indicating a door open error is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. In this state, when the setting switch 13 is pressed once, the acquired number display LED 78 displays "U7" indicating that it is an advantageous section ratio. Then, when a certain time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed, "50", which is a numerical value of the advantageous section ratio, is displayed. If this state is left unattended, "U7" and "50" are alternately displayed every 2 seconds.

After that, as in the example of FIG. 39, each time the setting switch 13 is operated, predetermined management information (information type and numerical value) is displayed. Next, when the front door is closed and the door switch 15 is turned off, the error content "dE" is displayed again (the door open error cannot be resolved simply by closing the front door). Then, in order to eliminate this error display, an error canceling operation is performed. For example, the error is cleared by inserting the door key into the keyhole provided in the front door and turning the door key counterclockwise, for example. When the error canceling operation is performed in this way, the acquired number "09" before the "dE" is displayed is displayed again on the acquired number display LED 78.

In the examples of FIGS. 39 and 40, when the continuous bonus ratio (6000 games) and the bonus ratio (6000 games) are less than the total number of games "6000", at least one of the information type and the numerical value is blinked. indicate. Similarly, when the continuous bonus ratio (cumulative) and the bonus ratio (cumulative) are less than the total number of games "175000", at least one of the information type and the numerical value is blinked and displayed.

<Second Embodiment>
Subsequently, the second embodiment of the present invention will be described.
In the second embodiment, the management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9) mounted on the main control board 50 (the main control board 50B when the main control board 50A and 50B are divided) is always used. , It is in the lit state.
There are various ways to display the five pieces of information shown in FIG. 38 when the information is constantly lit. For example, the management information to be displayed may be updated every 5 seconds. Specifically, "U750" (displayed for 5 seconds) → "y645" (displayed for 5 seconds) → ... "A752" (displayed for 5 seconds) → "U750" (displayed for 5 seconds) → ... Can be mentioned. It should be noted that a digit extinguishing time of about 0.5 to 1 second may be provided between each information display.

FIG. 41 is an external perspective view showing the base portion 1 of the slot machine 10. In FIG. 41, the illustration of the front door is omitted. In FIG. 41, the front door opens / closes the front surface of the base portion 1 with the “front door opening / closing shaft” (left side in the drawing) as a support shaft. Further, although FIG. 41 is used in the description of the second embodiment, the structure of the first embodiment is also the same as that of FIG. 41.
As shown in FIG. 41, a power supply unit including a power switch 11, a medal payout device including a hopper 35, a symbol display device including three reels 31, and the like are housed inside the base portion 1.
Further, the sub-control board 80 is attached to the left side surface of the base unit 1 on the inner surface side. On the other hand, the substrate case 16 and the main control substrate 50 housed therein are attached to the back surface inside the inner surface of the substrate portion 1. Furthermore, the board case 16 and the main control board 50 are attached above the symbol display device so that the state of the crimped portion 16a of the board case 16 can be easily visually confirmed when the front door is opened. Therefore, it is attached to a relatively easy-to-see position in the base portion 1.
Therefore, the management information display LED 74 mounted on the main control board 50 can also be visually confirmed relatively easily.

In the specifications of the slot machine 10, in addition to the method in which medals are automatically replenished to the hopper 35a when the medals in the hopper 35 are exhausted, the clerk in the hall opens the front door every time the medals in the hopper 35 are exhausted. Then, a method of supplying medals to the hopper 35 is known.
However, when the front door is opened, the management information display LED 74 mounted on the main control board 50 always displays the management information, so that the player can see the management information. .. As a result, it is possible to know the ratio of advantageous sections of the table currently being played, the ratio of continuous characters, and the like. Therefore, there is a possibility that the set value can be estimated based on these values.
Therefore, in the second embodiment, the management information display LED 74 mounted on the main control board 50 constantly displays the management information, but is not easily visible to the player.

FIG. 42 is a diagram showing the substrate case 16 and the main control substrate 50 (50A and 50B) in the second embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 3 in the first embodiment. In FIG. 42, Example 1 of (a) shows an example in which the main control board 50 is composed of one, and Example 2 of (b) is composed of two main control boards of 50A and 50B. An example is shown (this point is the same as FIG. 3 of the first embodiment).
FIG. 42A is different from the first embodiment in that the management information display LED 74 is arranged as close to the left side as possible when viewed from the front of the main control board 50. In FIG. 41, the opening / closing shaft of the front door is provided on the left side when viewed from the front in the figure. Therefore, if the management information display LED 74 is arranged as far to the left as possible when viewed from the front, even if the front door is opened. , It becomes difficult for the player to see.

Further, in the example of FIG. 3B, the arrangement of the main control boards 50A and 50B was reversed from that of FIG. 3B. The management information display LED 74 is mounted on the main control board 50B, but is located on the left side in the board case 16.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the distance (distance) between the management information display LED 74 and the caulking portion 16a is increased. In FIG. 42, assuming that the position of the management information display LED 74 is to the left, when the caulking portion 16a of the board case 16 is moved away from the management information display LED 74, the caulking portion 16a is as shown in FIG. 42 (the same applies to FIG. 3). Is the right end of the substrate case 16.
By doing so, even when the caulking portion 16a is destroyed to access the main control boards 50 (50A and 50B), the management information display LED 74 is damaged or damaged when the caulking portion 16a is destroyed. It is possible to prevent the spilling more effectively.

Further, the caulking portion 16a is for breaking when the board case 16 is opened, but in addition to the caulking portion 16a, a main body caulking portion (not shown) for fixing the game machine and the board case 16 is provided. You may have. At this time, when removing the board case 16 from the game machine, it is necessary to destroy the crimped portion of the main body as well. In this case as well, as in the case of the crimped portion 16a, the position where the crimped portion of the main body is provided is the first position in order to prevent the management information display LED 74 from being accidentally damaged or damaged when the crimped portion of the main body is destroyed. When it is a position (for example, the upper end of the board case 16), the position where the management information display LED 74 is provided is a second position away from the first position (for example, a lower part and a right side with reference to the central part of the main control board 50). It is desirable to provide it in the square or left side).

As described above, by arranging the management information display LED 74 in a position direction different from the position direction in which the caulking portion 16a and / or the main body caulking portion is provided, damage to the management information display LED 74 can be effectively prevented. it can.
Although the position of the crimped portion 16a is the right end portion, the position is not limited to this, and for example, it can be designed as the upper end portion. At this time, since the management information display LED 74 is a lower portion, a right portion, or a left portion with reference to the central portion of the main control board 50, the management information display LED 74 is erroneously damaged when the caulking portion 16a is destroyed. It can be prevented from being damaged or damaged.

Although one embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) The upper limit of the number of games in the advantageous section is set to 1500, but the upper limit is not limited to this, for example, the number of payouts is 3000, the difference is 2000, and the instruction function operating game (when the small role B group is won). It is also possible to set using a variable other than the total number of games, such as 100 games. Alternatively, it is also possible to set a plurality of conditions such as 1500 games or 3000 cards, and when any one of them is satisfied, it is determined that the upper limit has been reached.

(2) The advantageous section display LED 77 uses the segment DP of the stored number display LED 76, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a dedicated display (LED or the like) for displaying whether or not the advantageous section is displayed may be provided. However, if the existing LED can be used as in the above embodiment, the cost can be reduced.
Here, the advantageous section is managed by the main control board 50 (main management), and the sub control board 80 does not manage the advantageous section. Therefore, the lamp displaying the advantageous section needs to be electrically connected to the main control board 50. For example, the effect lamp 21 electrically connected to the sub control board 80 displays the advantageous section. It cannot be a lamp.
However, even a lamp that looks as if it is a kind of effect lamp can be used as a lamp that displays an advantageous section as long as it is a lamp controlled by the main control board 50.

Further, the advantageous section display LED 77 is composed of the segment DP of the digit 2 of the stored number display LEDs 76, but may be composed of the segment DP of the digit 4 of the acquired number display LEDs 78, for example.

Furthermore, when the player ends the game, the menu button 25 may be operated in order to display the game history (two-dimensional code). Therefore, if the advantageous section display LED is arranged in the vicinity of the menu button 25, the player can be made aware that the advantageous section is in progress at the end of the game. For example, even if the storage number display LED76 (the segment DP of the digit 2 is designated as the advantageous section display LED77) or the acquired number display LED78 (the segment DP of the digit 4 is designated as the advantageous section display LED77) is arranged near the menu button 25. Good. Of course, as shown in FIG. 2, it is also effective to provide the advantageous section display LED 77 in the vicinity of the settlement switch 46. Further, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, the menu button 25 is turned on before the menu button 25 can be operated, so that the player does not notice the shift to the advantageous section. It is possible to prevent the operation (displaying the game history (two-dimensional code)).

(3) When the power switch 11 is turned off while the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit and the power switch 11 is turned on again, the advantageous section control means 69 turns the power on / off. In order to maintain the advantageous section before and after, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on again. Therefore, for example, when the store is closed with the advantageous section display LED 77 lit in the hall, or when the advantageous section display LED 77 is to be turned off at the start of business the next day, the setting is changed (including resetting the same set value). Can be mentioned. By changing the setting, the predetermined area of the RWM53 is initialized, and the display data (data of the advantageous section) of the storage number display LED76 is also initialized. Therefore, in the segment data of the digit 2, the 8th bit is also "0". ".

(4) During the advantageous section, the instruction function is activated in the game in which the condition device capable of operating the instruction function is won. However, not limited to this, it is not always necessary to activate the instruction function even in the game in which the condition device capable of operating the instruction function is won in the advantageous section. The advantageous section is a game section in which the instruction function can be operated. Therefore, after shifting to the advantageous section, whether or not to execute the instruction function operating game and the number of games of the instruction function operating game are determined by lottery or the like, and the instruction function operating game is executed only for the determined number of games. May be good. Then, even if the number of games is completed, if the continuation condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, it is possible to continue staying in the advantageous section and determine the number of games to execute the instruction function activated game again by lottery or the like. Is. Furthermore, during the advantageous section, the lottery for falling from the advantageous section to the normal section is based on winning each game or a specific condition device (for example, a common setting such as a single winning of a small winning combination D or a small winning combination E1). To decide.

(5) In the present embodiment, the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is stored as a value obtained by multiplying the number of games by 100. Similarly, the value corresponding to the number of payouts when the continuous accessory is operated and the value corresponding to the number of payouts when the accessory is operating are stored as values obtained by multiplying the number of payouts by 100, respectively. However, not limited to this, depending on the calculation method (CPU used) of the advantageous section ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, and the bonus ratio, it is possible to store the number of games itself and the number of payouts themselves without multiplying by 100. Therefore, it is not always limited to storing a value multiplied by 100.
Similarly, the value of the total number of games is limited to the number of games itself, but is not limited to this, and depending on the convenience of calculation, a value obtained by adding a predetermined number to the total number of games or a value obtained by multiplying a predetermined value (total games). The value corresponding to the number of times) may be stored.
In this case, when the advantageous section ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, and the bonus ratio are calculated, the calculation of multiplying the data in the storage area in which the number of games itself and the number of payouts itself is stored by 100 and repeatedly executing the subtraction process described above. It can be calculated by executing the process (for example, FIG. 37).

(6) The advantageous section ratio, continuous accessory operation ratio, and accessory operation ratio are calculated for each game or a predetermined number of games regardless of whether or not the management information is displayed, and are stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53. You may leave it. On the other hand, the advantageous section ratio, the continuous accessory operation ratio, and the accessory operation ratio are calculated when the management information is displayed (when a display request is made), the calculation result is stored in a predetermined area of the RWM53, and the calculation is performed. The result may be displayed.

(7) In the above embodiment, the management information is displayed in order each time the setting switch 13 is pressed. However, the switch is not limited to the setting switch 13, and may be another switch such as a bet switch 40, or a switch dedicated to displaying management information may be separately provided.
Further, in the present embodiment, the setting switch 13 and the reset switch 14 are provided separately, but it is conceivable that the setting switch and the reset switch are composed of one switch as the setting change / reset switch. In this case, if the operation of the setting change / reset switch does not overlap with the reset (initialization) operation, the management information can be displayed by the operation of the setting change / reset switch. The same applies to the case where the setting switch 13 and the reset switch 14 are provided separately as in the present embodiment, and the management information is displayed by operating the reset switch 14.

Specifically, when an error is detected, the mode does not shift to the management information display mode, and the mode shifts to the management information display mode on condition that no error has occurred.
For example, if a medal retention error occurs in the medal selector among the recoverable errors, the mode does not shift to the management information display mode unless the error is removed.

Further, in the above embodiment, the management information is displayed each time the setting switch 13 is pressed. That is, even if the operator releases the operation switch 13 after turning on the setting switch 13, the management information remains displayed. On the other hand, the management information may be displayed only while the setting switch 13 is pressed, and the display of the management information may be terminated when the operator releases the setting switch 13. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 3, when the setting switch 13 is pressed first, the first management information "U750" is displayed, but when the setting switch 13 is released, the display ends (digits 6 to 6). Turn off 9). Next, when the setting switch 13 is pressed, the second management information "y645" is displayed, but when the setting switch 13 is released, the display can be controlled to end. Even when the switch for displaying the management information is a switch other than the setting switch 13, the same control as described above is possible.

In this way, there are various variations in which switch is used to display management information and how the relationship between the operation of the switch displaying management information and the display pattern (displaying time) is changed. However, the present invention is not limited to the one shown in the present embodiment.
Furthermore, for example, when the management information display LED 74 is mounted on the main control board 50, the management information display pattern may be
a) Display pattern for constantly displaying management information b) Pattern for displaying management information when the front door is opened (when the door switch 15 is turned on) c) The front door is opened and a predetermined switch Patterns that display management information when you operate d) Open the front door, insert the setting key to turn on the setting key switch 12, and display management information when you operate a predetermined switch. Be done.
However, when the operation to shift to the setting change mode is performed and the setting shift mode is entered, the shift to the management information display mode is not performed and the management information is not displayed. That is, in the setting change mode, the digits 5 are turned on, but the digits 6 to 9 are turned off.

(8) In the present embodiment, the total number of games is counted until the total number of games is counted to 3 bytes full (“FFFFFF (H)”). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when the cumulative total reaches a predetermined value, the counting may be terminated even if the upper limit of the storage capacity has not been reached.
Further, when the total number of games reaches a predetermined value, the data value of the total number of games may be cleared and the total number of games may be counted again.
The same applies to the total number of payouts.

(9) The slot machine 10 of the present embodiment is designed so that the advantageous section ratio is "70" (%) or less. For this reason, it is not assumed that the ratio of advantageous sections will exceed "70" (%) in the market. However, it cannot be denied that the ratio of advantageous sections may exceed "70" (%), for example, when a goto act is performed. Therefore, for example, the data value of "F008" that stores the advantageous section ratio is monitored, and when the value exceeds "70 (D)", some warning is output or the advantageous section ratio is displayed. It is possible to make it different from the normal time (display that it is abnormal). For example, among the display of the information type "U7" of the advantageous section ratio, a method of alternately blinking the upper digit "U" and the lower digit "7" at high speed can be mentioned.

Similarly, regarding the continuous accessory ratio and the accessory ratio, when the design value upper limit is set to, for example, "60 (%)", and the continuous accessory ratio or the accessory ratio exceeds the design value upper limit, something is done. Examples include a method of outputting a warning and displaying the information type display in the same manner as above.
Alternatively, the external signal transmitting means 70 may be used to transmit information such as the advantageous section ratio to the hall computer 200, and for example, when the advantageous section ratio exceeds "70" (%), the information related to the warning may be transmitted. Can be mentioned.

(10) As described above, if the advantageous section ratio is set to be "70" (%) or less with respect to all the game sections, the others can be set relatively freely.
In addition, the winning of the normal section to the advantageous section may be set to less than "1/32".
Furthermore, as described above, during the advantageous section, the instruction function may be activated whenever the condition device capable of operating the instruction function is won, but the instruction function is not activated only by shifting to the advantageous section, and the instruction is instructed. When the lottery for whether or not to activate the function is won, the instruction function may be activated. Alternatively, when shifting to an advantageous section, whether to make it an advantageous section that always activates the instruction function, or to make it an advantageous section that activates the instruction function only when the lottery for whether to activate the instruction function is won. , May be decided by lottery or the like.

Further, the transition from the advantageous section to the normal section (end of the advantageous section) may be made when the predetermined number of games is exhausted at the time of transition to the advantageous section, or the number of games may not be determined. , Every game, or when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a lottery for shifting (falling) from an advantageous section to a normal section may be performed, and when this lottery is won, the section may be shifted from the advantageous section to the normal section. However, when the count value reaches the upper limit by the upper limit counter 69b, it is unconditionally controlled so as to end the advantageous section and shift to the normal section.

(11) In FIG. 3, the management information display LED 74 provided on the main control board 50 is composed of four digits, but may be composed of, for example, two digits. Then, for example, as shown in the examples of FIGS. 39 and 40, when the setting switch 13 is pressed, the information type "U7" is displayed, the numerical value "50" is displayed after the lapse of a predetermined time, and then the predetermined time. "U7" and "50" may be alternately and repeatedly displayed each time.

(12) Since the advantageous section ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, and the accessory ratio are calculated by rounding down the decimal point, accurate values are not always displayed. In that sense, the advantageous section ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, and the bonus ratio correspond to the advantageous section ratio (equivalent), the continuous bonus ratio (equivalent), and the bonus ratio, respectively. ) Also referred to as the value to be.
In addition, the advantageous section ratio, continuous bonus ratio, and bonus ratio are not limited to the values with the decimal point rounded down, the numbers with the decimal point rounded off, the numbers with the decimal point rounded up, and the last digit is "5" or " It may be a numerical value converted in increments of "10".

(13) In the present embodiment, the combination of symbols that stop at the effective line is the same when the small winning combination E1 is won and when the small winning combination E2 is won. For example, when the small winning combination E1 or E2 is won, the middle-tier cherry can be stopped (winning the small winning combination 36) at the left or middle first stop, and the middle-tier cherry does not appear at the right first stop. (Small role 38 prize). Therefore, it was not possible to determine whether the small winning combination E1 or E2 was won regardless of the appearance of the middle cherry.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when the middle cherry is not made to appear, the stop result may be different instead.
For example, when the small winning combination E1 or E2 is won, the middle cherry is made to appear when the left or middle first stop is made, and when the middle cherry appears, the player determines whether the small winning combination E1 or E2 is won. Make it impossible.

On the other hand, when the small winning combination E1 or E2 is won, when the right first stop is made, the middle-tier cherry is controlled so as not to appear as described above, and instead of not causing the middle-tier cherry to appear, the small winning combination E1 or E2 It is possible to make a stop roll that allows the player to judge which one is won.

Specifically, for example, control can be mentioned as follows.
First, the small winning combinations included in the winning of the small winning combination E1 are the small winning combinations 36 and 38, as in the above embodiment.
On the other hand, the small wins included in the winning of the small win E2 are the small wins 36 and 41 (the small win 41 is newly added).
Then, the small winning combination 36 (middle cherry) can be stopped at the time of the left or middle first stop when the small winning combination E1 or E2 is won, and the small winning combination 38 is stopped at the time of the right first stop at the time of winning the small winning combination E1. On the other hand, the small winning combination 41 is stopped at the first right stop when the small winning combination E2 is won.

As a combination of the symbols of the small winning combination 41, for example, "Bell A / Bell B"-"Replay"-"Black 7 / Blue 7 / Red 7 / Blank". As a result, the design of the middle reel 31 is different between when the small winning combination 38 is stopped and when the small winning combination 41 is stopped. When the small winning combination 38 is stopped, the "replay" does not stop on the middle reel 31, but when the small winning combination 41 is stopped, the "replay" always stops on the middle reel 31. Thereby, the winning of the small winning combination 38 (small winning combination E1) or the small winning combination 41 (small winning combination E2) can be determined.

Further, regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42, the small winning combination 38 is stopped when the middle cherry is not stopped when the small winning combination E1 is won, and the small winning combination 41 is stopped when the middle cherry is not stopped when the small winning combination E2 is won. You may. In this way, it is possible to determine whether the small winning combination E1 or the small winning combination E2 has been won when the middle-stage cherry is not stopped, even when the left or middle first stop is made.

In addition, for example, the following method can be mentioned.
The small winning combination included in the winning of the small winning combination E1 is the small winning combination 36 and 38 as in the above embodiment. Further, the small winning combination included in the winning of the small winning combination E2 is also the small winning combination 36, the small winning combination 37 and 38, as in the above embodiment. The small winning combination 36 (middle cherry) can be stopped at the time of the left or middle first stop when the small winning combination E1 or E2 is won, and the small winning combination 38 is changed by the operation timing of the stop switch 42 at the time of the right first stop when the small winning combination E1 is won. The small winning combination 38 is stopped by the operation timing of the stop switch 42 at the time of the first right stop when the small winning combination E2 is won.
Then, when the small winning combination 38 is missed when the small winning combination E1 or E2 is won, the combination of different symbols is stopped. As a result, it may be possible to determine whether the small winning combination E1 or E2 has been won.

(14) When 1BBA + small winning combination E1 is won and the advantageous section display LED77 is turned on by the time when the predetermined timing of the next game arrives, the effect (continuous effect, etc.) of whether or not to shift to the advantageous section is not output. Is preferable. This is because the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, so that the player knows that he / she has shifted to the advantageous section. However, it is possible to output the continuous production of whether or not 1BBA (special role) has been won. Further, when 1BBA + small winning combination E1 is won and it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not always turned on even after a predetermined timing has passed (always shown in the figure). At the timing 2) shown in 23, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by the time the predetermined timing of the next game of the game in which the small winning combination E1 has won is reached, so that the small winning combination E1 is independently elected and the advantageous section is entered. Since it can be seen that it has been decided to shift, in such a case, it is not necessary to output an effect that incites whether or not the player has won 1BB.

(15) In the present embodiment, when the push order is incorrect when the small winning combination B group is won, one winning combination can be won. However, the number of small wins that can be won when the push order is incorrect at the time of winning the small win group B is not limited to this. Further, the omission rate at the time of incorrect answer of the push order at the time of winning the small winning combination B group is 75% in this embodiment, but is not limited to this, and various settings such as 50% can be set.
Further, even when the push order is incorrect when the small winning combination C is won, it is possible to set the winning combination to be missed with a certain probability as in the case where the small winning combination B is won.

(16) In the above embodiment, during 1BBA operation, the number of games (expected value) of setting 6 is increased with respect to setting 1, and it is advantageous when, for example, the number of games during 1BBA operation reaches a predetermined number. The section was added.
However, contrary to the above, during 1BBA operation, the winning probability of the small winning combination A of the setting 6 is increased and the winning probability of the small winning combination E2 is lowered with respect to the setting 1, so that the game with the setting 6 is smaller. It may be the number of times (expected value). In this case, for example, when the operation of 1BBA is completed with a small number of games (setting 6 is easier to achieve than setting 1), an advantageous section may be added.

(17) In the present embodiment, when it is decided to shift to an advantageous section at the time of a single winning of a conditional device that does not include a special combination that can carry over the winning, for example, a small winning combination E1, it is advantageous by a predetermined timing. It was decided to turn on the section display LED 77. Here, the "predetermined timing" is not limited to the timing shown in the above embodiment, and various settings can be made. For example, in the game when the small winning combination E1 is won, when the winning determination is completed, when the medal is paid out in the game, when the medal payout is finished, and so on.

Further, although it does not occur in the present embodiment, for example, when the replay decides to shift to the advantageous section in the winning game, the automatic bet ends based on the winning of the replay, or the game starts in the next game (replay). When the switch 41 is operated, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on.

(18) At the time of winning "1BBA + small winning combination E1", if the stop switch 42 is operated at the left or middle first stop, the small winning combination 36 can be won, so that the middle cherry can appear. However, when the winning flag is only the small winning combination E1, the middle-tier cherry can appear, and when the winning flag of 1BBA is also set, the middle-tier cherry does not appear in any push order (all small winning combination 38 is won). The stop control may be performed as follows.
When controlled in this way, there is a demerit that the player cannot be fanned by displaying the middle cherry even when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section at the time of winning "1BBA + small winning combination E1".

On the other hand, even when the small winning combination E1 is won alone after being inside the 1BBA, the standing winning flag is "1BBA + small winning combination E1", so that the same stop control as described above can be adopted.
As mentioned above, it is not possible to decide the transition to the advantageous section inside, so even if the player wins the small role E1 and the middle cherry appears after knowing that the player is inside, the player will not be able to decide. , I get the impression that I wasted money. On the other hand, if the stop control as described above is performed, the middle cherry does not appear at all inside, so that the player does not have to give the impression that he / she has made a wasteful pull.

In particular, there are "bell A / bell B"-"cherry"-"black 7 / blue 7 / red 7 / blank" (FIG. 11) as a combination of symbols of the small winning combination 38, and this combination of symbols and patterns It is similar to the symbol 02 "bell A / bell B"-"cherry"-"bell A / bell B". Therefore, by making the combination of the above symbols of the small winning combination 38 appear, it is possible to make it appear to be missed when the small winning combination B group is won (not shown as a rare role).
The above is the same when "1BBA + small role E2" is won, when 1BBB is inside and then small role E1 is won alone, or when 1BBB is inside and then small role E2 is won alone. Is.

(19) As shown in FIG. 17, the winning probability of the replay is the same (the number is "8978") between the non-RT and the RT1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning probability of the RT1 replay may be set higher than the winning probability of the non-RT replay.

(20) In the present embodiment, after the 1BBB operation is completed, the transition to RT1 is performed, a lottery for replay E is performed at RT1, and an advantageous section is added by winning the replay E. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the player shifts to RT1 during the advantageous section, the advantageous section can be set in the additional special zone (a state in which the frequency of addition is high and the number of additional games is large). Then, the pattern symbol is displayed, the addition special zone is continued until the transition to RT2, and every time a predetermined condition is satisfied in this RT1 (not limited to the winning of Replay E), the addition of the advantageous section is executed. May be good.

(21) In the present embodiment, the RT after the end of the 1BBA operation is set to non-RT, and the RT after the end of the 1BBB operation is set to RT1. However, instead of migrating to different RTs in this way, they may be migrated to the same RT. For example, it may be shifted to non-RT after 1BBB operation is completed. In this case, after the 1BBB operation in the advantageous section is completed, the advantageous section may be added and set as a special zone.

(22) In the present embodiment, the advantageous section ratio (cumulative), continuous bonus ratio (6000 games and cumulative total), and bonus ratio (6000 games and cumulative total) are displayed as management information, but other than these. It is also possible to calculate and display management information, such as the payout rate.
Examples of the method of calculating the payout rate include the following methods.
a) "Total number of payouts x 100" / "Total number of games excluding replays after winning a replay"
b) "(Total number of payouts + number of replay prizes x 3) x 100" ÷ "total number of games played"
Then, when a) is adopted, each buffer for storing "total number of payouts x 100" and "total number of games excluding replays after winning the replay" is provided. Further, when b) is adopted, a buffer for storing "(total number of payouts + number of replay winnings x 3) x 100" is provided. It should be noted that buffers of "total number of payouts x 100" and "replay winning count x 300" may be provided separately, and the values of both may be added.

In addition, "3" of "replay winning number of times x 3" means the number of bets of the game when a replay wins. For example, when the number of bets fluctuates depending on the game state, etc., the bet number is not limited to "3", but is the value bet on the game when the replay wins (for example, "2" or "1"). There may be games to play.
In addition, it has a storage area that stores the total number of games, the total number of payouts, and the number of replay wins (may be "the number of replay wins x the value bet on the game when the replay wins"), and the payout rate can be determined. When calculating, the value may be multiplied by 100 before calculation.

Further, as the calculation methods of a) and b), a method of repeating subtraction is adopted in the same manner as the above-mentioned calculation method.
Then, by displaying the payout rate as one of the management information and comparing it with the design payout rate, it is possible to determine whether or not the game machine is illegal. Further, also in this case, if the lighting mode is different depending on whether or not the total number of games is 6000 games or more and 175,000 games or more, whether or not the game machine is more accurately illegal. It becomes possible to judge whether or not.
The information type indicating the payout rate may be any display as long as it can be distinguished from other management information. For example, digit 6 is displayed as "P." and digits 7 to 9 are displayed. It is possible to display the payout rate (three-digit numerical value) using.

(23) In the present embodiment, it has been explained that the upper limit counter 69b may be a decrement counter and an increment counter. Here, adopting an increment counter for the upper limit counter 69b has the following merits.
When the count value of the upper limit counter 69b reaches the upper limit, for example, when the count value becomes "1500" in the case of an increment counter, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated, so that various parameters related to the advantageous section (stored in RWM53) are stored. Initialize the value). Examples of the parameters to be initialized include an advantageous section counter 69a, an upper limit counter 69b, and the number of games of the instruction function operating game (when the instruction function is activated when the small winning combination B group is won). Then, "0" is the optimum value at the time of initialization. Further, it is preferable that the addresses of the RWM 53 for storing the parameters to be initialized are continuous. Specifically, for example, "F100", "F101", "F102", ...

This is simple because it can be initialized by repeating the process of inserting "0" into the address of the RWM53 within the predetermined range while shifting the address by one, similar to the initialization process of the RWM53 accompanying the setting change. This is because it can be executed by the converted processing. The parameters that are cleared with the advantageous section as the upper limit are initialized even when the setting is changed.
The address of the RWM53 that stores the parameters to be initialized is assigned with regularity (for example, "F100", "F102", "F104", ...), And "0" is assigned to the address. Even when the process of inserting is initialized by repeatedly shifting the address by a predetermined value (“2” in the above case), the process can be simplified.

Here, when the upper limit counter 69b is a decrement counter and the count value is "0", it means that it is "0" due to the initialization, or the advantageous section is the upper limit value (1500 games). ) And "0" cannot be determined from the count value. Therefore, when determining whether or not it is the upper limit of the advantageous section based on the count value of the upper limit counter 69b, the count value of the upper limit counter 69b and the data indicating whether or not it is an advantageous section (in a predetermined area of RWM53). Must be done based on (remembered).
On the other hand, when the upper limit counter 69b is an increment counter, the count value of the upper limit counter 69b is read, and if it is "1500", it can be determined that it is the upper limit of the advantageous section. That is, it can be determined whether or not it is the upper limit only by the count value of the upper limit counter 69b.

(24) The update of the data of RWM53 shown in FIGS. 27 to 30 and the processing of FIGS. 32, 36, and 37 are executed at the end of each game, more specifically, after the winning determination processing. ..
On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the management information such as the advantageous section ratio is always displayed, so that the same management information (for example, the advantageous section ratio) may be displayed a plurality of times in one game, for example. ..
Then, it is conceivable to calculate the advantageous section ratio and the like each time when displaying.
From the above, the same management information (for example, advantageous section ratio) may be calculated multiple times in one game.
(25) The above-described embodiment and various modifications are not limited to being carried out alone, but can be carried out in combination as appropriate.

<Additional notes>
Examples of the inventions (initial inventions) described in the original specification of the present application include the following initial inventions 1 to 21, which solve the problems to be solved by each initial invention and the problems related to the initial invention, respectively. The means for this and the effects of the original invention are as follows. However, the invention described in the present specification does not mean that the invention is limited to the initial inventions 1 to 21.

1. 1. Initial invention 1
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 1 The initial invention relates to a slot machine provided with an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In a conventional game machine, it is known that the cumulative value of the number of payouts is stored and the transition of the cumulative number of payouts is displayed as a graph by the operation of the player (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-125121). reference).
In a conventional game machine, the cumulative value of the number of payouts can be confirmed, but in a slot machine that executes AT, for example, it is not possible to know the ratio of AT to the total game.
In addition, it was not possible to determine whether or not it was within the range of the design value simply by displaying the cumulative value of the number of payouts.
The problem to be solved by the initial invention is to make it possible to easily and accurately confirm the stay ratio of the advantageous section in the slot machine provided with the advantageous section.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 1 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when the small role B group is won) and
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating the instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78) and
Of the game sections, the normal section in which the instruction function operating game is not executed and the normal section
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operating game can be executed is provided.
When the transition condition to the advantageous section is satisfied in the normal section, the transition to the advantageous section is performed, and when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated.
A first storage means (RWM53: “F007” to “F005” in FIG. 27) capable of storing a value corresponding to the total number of games played,
A second storage means (RWM53: "F004" to "F001" in FIG. 27) capable of storing a value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section (a value obtained by multiplying the number of games played by 100),
Means for calculating a value corresponding to the stay ratio of an advantageous section based on the values stored in the first storage means and the second storage means (advantageous section control means 69; FIG. 37).
It is characterized by providing means (management information display LED74 (digits 6 to 9)) for displaying a value corresponding to the stay ratio of the advantageous section when the condition for displaying the stay ratio of the advantageous section is satisfied.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 1 According to the initial invention, the value corresponding to the total number of games and the value corresponding to the number of games in the advantageous section are stored, and the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section is calculated. Since it can be displayed, it is possible to easily and accurately confirm the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section.
Further, it can be easily determined whether or not the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section is within the range of the design value.

2. Initial invention 2
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 2 Same as the original invention 1.
(B) Means for Solving the Problem of Initial Invention 2 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when the small role B group is won) and
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating the instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78) and
Of the game sections, the normal section in which the instruction function operating game is not executed and the normal section
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operating game can be executed is provided.
When the transition condition to the advantageous section is satisfied in the normal section, the transition to the advantageous section is performed, and when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated.
A first storage means (RWM53: “F007” to “F005” in FIG. 27) capable of storing a value corresponding to the total number of games played,
A second storage means (RWM53: "F004" to "F001" in FIG. 27) capable of storing a value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section (a value obtained by multiplying the number of games played by 100),
Means for calculating a value corresponding to the stay ratio of an advantageous section based on the values stored in the first storage means and the second storage means (advantageous section control means 69; FIG. 37).
It is equipped with a means (management information display LED74 (digits 6 to 9)) for displaying a value corresponding to the stay ratio of the advantageous section when the condition for displaying the stay ratio of the advantageous section is satisfied.
When the value stored in the first storage means has not reached a predetermined value (“175000” game), a value corresponding to the stay ratio of the advantageous section is displayed in a specific display mode (for example, a mode in which the LED blinks). And
When the value stored in the first storage means reaches a predetermined value, the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section is displayed in a display mode different from the specific display mode (for example, a mode in which the LED is turned on). It is characterized by that.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 2 According to the initial invention, a value corresponding to the total number of games and a value corresponding to the number of games in the advantageous section are stored, and a value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section is calculated. Since it can be displayed, it is possible to easily and accurately confirm the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section.
Further, it can be easily determined whether or not the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section is within the range of the design value.
In addition, it is possible to easily determine how many games the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section is.

3. 3. Initial invention 3
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 3 Same as the original invention 1.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 3 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when the small role B group is won) and
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating the instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78) and
Of the game sections, the normal section in which the instruction function operating game is not executed and the normal section
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operating game can be executed is provided.
When the transition condition to the advantageous section is satisfied in the normal section, the transition to the advantageous section is performed, and when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated.
A first storage means (RWM53: “F007” to “F005” in FIG. 27) capable of storing a value corresponding to the total number of games played,
A second storage means (RWM53: "F004" to "F001" in FIG. 27) capable of storing a value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section (a value obtained by multiplying the number of games played by 100),
Means for calculating a value corresponding to the stay ratio of an advantageous section based on the values stored in the first storage means and the second storage means (advantageous section control means 69; FIG. 37).
It is equipped with a means (management information display LED74 (digits 6 to 9)) for displaying a value corresponding to the stay ratio in an advantageous section.
A value corresponding to the stay ratio of the advantageous section is displayed based on the fact that a predetermined switch (for example, the setting switch 13) is on, and the stay in the advantageous section is displayed based on the fact that the predetermined switch is off. The feature is that the value corresponding to the ratio is not displayed.

The second solution is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when the small role B group is won) and
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating the instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78) and
Of the game sections, the normal section in which the instruction function operating game is not executed and the normal section
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operating game can be executed is provided.
When the transition condition to the advantageous section is satisfied in the normal section, the transition to the advantageous section is performed, and when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated.
A first storage means (RWM53: “F007” to “F005” in FIG. 27) capable of storing a value corresponding to the total number of games played,
A second storage means (RWM53: "F004" to "F001" in FIG. 27) capable of storing a value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section (a value obtained by multiplying the number of games played by 100),
Means for calculating a value corresponding to the stay ratio of an advantageous section based on the values stored in the first storage means and the second storage means (advantageous section control means 69; FIG. 37).
It is equipped with a means (management information display LED74 (digits 6 to 9)) for displaying a value corresponding to the stay ratio in an advantageous section.
A value corresponding to the stay ratio of the advantageous section is displayed based on the operation of a predetermined switch (for example, the setting switch 13), and the stay ratio of the advantageous section is supported based on the operation of the predetermined switch again. It is characterized by ending the display of the value to be performed.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 3 According to the initial invention, a value corresponding to the total number of games and a value corresponding to the number of games in the advantageous section are stored, and a value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section is calculated. Since it can be displayed, it is possible to easily and accurately confirm the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section.
Further, it can be easily determined whether or not the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section is within the range of the design value.
In addition, the display / non-display of the value corresponding to the stay ratio of the advantageous section can be switched by a simple operation of a predetermined switch.

4. Initial invention 4
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 4 Same as the original invention 1.
(B) Means for Solving the Problem of Initial Invention 4 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when the small role B group is won) and
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating the instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78) and
Of the game sections, the normal section in which the instruction function operating game is not executed and the normal section
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operating game can be executed is provided.
When the transition condition to the advantageous section is satisfied in the normal section, the transition to the advantageous section is performed, and when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated.
A first storage means (RWM53: in FIG. 27, "F007" to "F005"" that can store a value obtained by adding "a value corresponding to" 1 "in a decimal number" for each game as a value corresponding to the total number of games )When,
A second storage means (RWM53: in FIG. 27) that can store a value obtained by adding "a value corresponding to" 100 "in a decimal number" for each game in the advantageous section as a value corresponding to the number of games in the advantageous section. F004 "to" F001 "),
A means for calculating a value corresponding to the stay ratio of an advantageous section based on a value stored in the first storage means and a value stored in the second storage means (advantageous section control means 69; FIG. 37).
It is characterized by being provided with a means (management information display LED74 (digits 6 to 9)) for displaying a value corresponding to the stay ratio of an advantageous section.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 4 According to the initial invention, a value corresponding to the total number of games and a value corresponding to the number of games in the advantageous section are stored, and a value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section is calculated. Since it can be displayed, it is possible to easily and accurately confirm the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section.
Further, it can be easily determined whether or not the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section is within the range of the design value.
In addition, when calculating the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section, an integer value can be calculated.

5. Initial invention 5
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 5 Same as the original invention 1.
(B) Means for Solving the Problem of Initial Invention 5 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when the small role B group is won) and
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating the instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78) and
Of the game sections, the normal section in which the instruction function operating game is not executed and the normal section
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operating game can be executed is provided.
When the transition condition to the advantageous section is satisfied in the normal section, the transition to the advantageous section is performed, and when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated.
A first storage means (RWM53: FIG. 27) having a storage area of 3 bytes and capable of storing a value obtained by adding "a value corresponding to" 1 "in a decimal number" for each game as a value corresponding to the total number of games. Medium, "F007" to "F005"),
A second storage that has a 4-byte storage area and can store a value obtained by adding "a value corresponding to" 100 "in a decimal number" for each game in the advantageous section as a value corresponding to the number of games in the advantageous section. Means (RWM53: "F004" to "F001" in FIG. 27) and
A third having a storage area of 1 byte and capable of storing a value corresponding to a stay ratio in an advantageous section calculated based on a value stored in the first storage means and a value stored in the second storage means. With a storage means (RWM53: “F008” in FIG. 27),
It is characterized by being provided with a means (management information display LED74 (digits 6 to 9)) for displaying a value corresponding to the stay ratio of an advantageous section.
(C) Effect of the original invention 5 Same as the original invention 4.

6. Initial invention 6
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 6 Same as the original invention 1.
(B) Means for Solving the Problem of Initial Invention 6 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when the small role B group is won) and
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating the instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78) and
Of the game sections, the normal section in which the instruction function operating game is not executed and the normal section
Of the game sections, the advantageous section in which the instruction function operating game can be executed, and
Memory means (RWM53) and
An initialization means (power switch 11, reset switch 14) that initializes at least a part of the storage means based on satisfying a predetermined condition is provided.
When the transition condition to the advantageous section is satisfied in the normal section, the transition to the advantageous section is performed, and when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated.
As the storage means
A first storage means (RWM53: in FIG. 27, "F007" to "F005"" that can store a value obtained by adding "a value corresponding to" 1 "in a decimal number" for each game as a value corresponding to the total number of games )When,
A second storage means (RWM53: in FIG. 27) that can store a value obtained by adding "a value corresponding to" 100 "in a decimal number" for each game in the advantageous section as a value corresponding to the number of games in the advantageous section. It has "F004" to "F001"), and
A means for calculating a value corresponding to the stay ratio of an advantageous section based on a value stored in the first storage means and a value stored in the second storage means (advantageous section control means 69; FIG. 37).
It is equipped with a means (management information display LED74 (digits 6 to 9)) for displaying a value corresponding to the stay ratio in an advantageous section.
The initialization means is characterized in that the values stored in the first storage means and the second storage means are not initialized.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 6 According to the initial invention, a value corresponding to the total number of games and a value corresponding to the number of games in the advantageous section are stored, and a value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section is calculated. Since it can be displayed, it is possible to easily and accurately confirm the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section.
Further, it can be easily determined whether or not the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section is within the range of the design value.
Further, even if the initialization operation is performed, the value corresponding to the stay ratio of the advantageous section can be displayed based on the data accumulated so far.

7. Initial invention 7
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 7 Same as the original invention 1.
(B) Means for Solving the Problem of Initial Invention 7 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when the small role B group is won) and
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating the instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78) and
Of the game sections, the normal section in which the instruction function operating game is not executed and the normal section
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operating game can be executed is provided.
When the transition condition to the advantageous section is satisfied in the normal section, the transition to the advantageous section is performed, and when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated.
A first storage means (RWM53: “F007” to “F005” in FIG. 27) capable of storing a value corresponding to the total number of games played,
A second storage means (RWM53: “F004” to “F001” in FIG. 27) capable of storing a value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section, and
Means for calculating a value corresponding to the stay ratio of an advantageous section based on the values stored in the first storage means and the second storage means (advantageous section control means 69; FIG. 37).
It is equipped with a means (management information display LED74 (digits 6 to 9)) for displaying a value corresponding to the stay ratio in an advantageous section.
If the upper limit of the storage capacity of the first storage means is not exceeded even if "a value corresponding to" 1 "in a decimal number" is added to the value stored in the first storage means for each game, the first 1 Add "value corresponding to" 1 "in decimal number" to the value stored in the storage means,
When the value stored in the first storage means is the upper limit value of the storage capacity of the first storage means, the value stored in the first storage means is controlled to be the upper limit value even as the game progresses. And
When the value stored in the first storage means is the upper limit of the storage capacity of the first storage means, the value stored in the second storage means is maintained even as the game progresses during the advantageous section. It is characterized by that.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 7 According to the initial invention, the value corresponding to the total number of games and the value corresponding to the number of games in the advantageous section are stored, and the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section is calculated. Since it can be displayed, it is possible to easily and accurately confirm the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section.
Further, it can be easily determined whether or not the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section is within the range of the design value.
Further, when the value stored in the first storage means reaches the upper limit of the storage capacity of the first storage means, the subsequent update of the values of the first storage means and the second storage means is completed. It is possible to eliminate the deviation between the data of.

8. Initial invention 8
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 8 Same as the original invention 1.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 8 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention was
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when the small role B group is won) and
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating the instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78) and
Of the game sections, the normal section in which the instruction function operating game is not executed and the normal section
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operating game can be executed is provided.
When the transition condition to the advantageous section is satisfied in the normal section, the transition to the advantageous section is performed, and when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated.
A first storage means (RWM53: "F007" to "F005" in FIG. 27) capable of storing a value corresponding to the total number of games played, and a second storage means (RWM53) capable of storing a value corresponding to the number of games played in an advantageous section. : In FIG. 27, "F004" to "F001"), and means for calculating a value corresponding to the stay ratio of the advantageous section based on the values stored in the first storage means and the second storage means (advantageous section control means). A main control board (main control board 50) including 69; FIG. 37) is provided.
The main control board includes a plurality of visible display units (digits 6 to 9).
When displaying the value corresponding to the stay ratio of the advantageous section, some of the display units (digits 6 and 7) display the content (information type) indicating the stay ratio of the advantageous section, and some of the others. The display unit (digits 8 and 9) is characterized in that a value (numerical value) corresponding to the stay ratio of the advantageous section is displayed.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 8 According to the initial invention, the value corresponding to the total number of games and the value corresponding to the number of games in the advantageous section are stored, and the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section is calculated. Since it can be displayed, it is possible to easily and accurately confirm the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section.
Further, it can be easily determined whether or not the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section is within the range of the design value.
Further, for example, even when a value other than the value corresponding to the stay ratio of the advantageous section is displayed on the display unit, the value corresponding to the stay ratio of the advantageous section can be identified without being confused with other information. ..

9. Initial invention 9
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 9 Same as the original invention 1.
(B) Means for Solving the Problem of Initial Invention 9 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when the small role B group is won) and
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating the instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78) and
Of the game sections, the normal section in which the instruction function operating game is not executed and the normal section
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operating game can be executed is provided.
When the transition condition to the advantageous section is satisfied in the normal section, the transition to the advantageous section is performed, and when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated.
A first storage means (RWM53: "F007" to "F005" in FIG. 27) capable of storing a value corresponding to the total number of games played, and a second storage means (RWM53) capable of storing a value corresponding to the number of games played in an advantageous section. : In FIG. 27, "F004" to "F001"), and means for calculating a value corresponding to the stay ratio of the advantageous section based on the values stored in the first storage means and the second storage means (advantageous section control means). A main control board (main control board 50) including 69; FIG. 37) is provided.
The main control board includes a plurality of visible display units (digits 6 to 9).
When the value corresponding to the stay ratio of the advantageous section exceeds the specific value (70%), the value corresponding to the stay ratio of the advantageous section is displayed on the display unit in a specific display mode (for example, blinking display), and the advantageous section is displayed. When the value corresponding to the stay ratio of the above does not exceed the specific value, the value corresponding to the stay ratio of the advantageous section is displayed on the display unit in a display mode different from the specific display mode (for example, lighting display). And.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 9 According to the initial invention, a value corresponding to the total number of games and a value corresponding to the number of games in the advantageous section are stored, and a value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section is calculated. Since it can be displayed, it is possible to easily and accurately confirm the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section.
Further, whether or not the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section is within the range of the design value can be easily determined by the display mode.

10. Initial invention 10
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 10 Conventionally, an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (for example, the correct answer pressing order when a pressing order bell is won) is executed. That (AT) is known.
Here, it is known that AT control (management) is executed not only on the sub control board but also on the main control board (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-161344).
However, the notification of the winning of the AT is exclusively executed by the sub control board, and even if the winning of the AT is determined by the main control board, the winning notification of the AT is not performed by the main control board.
Further, even when the AT winning notification is performed using the peripheral device electrically connected to the main control board, the AT winning notification is performed after the predetermined game from the game in which the AT is won. There is a problem that a person may stop the game before the notification of winning the AT.
Therefore, the problem to be solved by the initial invention is to display the transition to the advantageous section by using the peripheral device electrically connected to the main control board when the transition to the advantageous section is performed, and the player. Is to make the display easier to notice.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 10 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when the small role B group is won) and
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating the instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78) and
Of the game sections, the normal section in which the instruction function operating game is not executed and the normal section
Of the game sections, the advantageous section in which the instruction function operating game can be executed, and
Storage number display means (storage number display LED76) for displaying the storage number of game media,
It is equipped with a settlement switch (46) that is operated when the stored game media is settled.
When the transition condition to the advantageous section is satisfied, the transition to the advantageous section is performed, and when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated.
The storage number display means has a plurality of segments (segments A to G, and DP) that can be lit, and displays the storage number by lighting some of the segments (segments A to G), and a part of the other. Indicates that it is an advantageous section by lighting the segment (segment DP) of
When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, it is possible to indicate that the section is advantageous by lighting some of the other segments before the operation of the settlement switch becomes effective.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 10 According to the initial invention, it is possible to indicate that the section is advantageous by using a part of the segments of the storage number display means.
In addition, since it is displayed that it is an advantageous section by the time the operation of the settlement switch becomes effective, the player may stop the game (operate the settlement switch) even though it is an advantageous section from the next game. It can be suppressed.

11. Initial invention 11
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 11 Conventionally, an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the correct answer pressing order when the pressing order bell is won) is executed. That (AT) is known.
Here, it is known that AT control (management) is executed not only on the sub control board but also on the main control board (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-161344).
Further, when the AT is won, for example, the number of precursory games is drawn by lottery, and after the number of precursory games is exhausted, the AT winning notification is given.
On the other hand, recently, it is being considered to shift to an advantageous section with the election of a special role as an opportunity. Here, at what timing is the display of the transition to the advantageous section when the transition to the advantageous section is triggered by the winning of the special role and when the transition to the advantageous section is triggered by the winning of a role other than the special role? The question is whether to execute with.
Therefore, the problem that the invention initially tries to solve is to display the transition to the advantageous section at an appropriate timing when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section when the winning combination is won.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 11 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when the small role B group is won) and
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating the instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78) and
Of the game sections, the normal section in which the instruction function operating game is not executed and the normal section
Of the game sections, the advantageous section in which the instruction function operating game can be executed, and
Advantageous section display means (advantageous section display LED77) for displaying that it is an advantageous section, and
Means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13) for determining one of a plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), and
It is provided with a lottery means for executing a lottery so as to have a case of first winning (1 BBA winning) or second winning (single winning of small role E1).
The winning probability of the first winning is the same for all set values,
The winning probability of the second winning is the same for all set values,
In the case of the first winning, if the combination of predetermined symbols corresponding to the first winning (combination of symbols of 1BBA) does not stop, the winning related to the combination of the predetermined symbols is carried over to the next game.
When the second win is won, the second win will not be carried over to the next game.
When the transition condition to the advantageous section is satisfied, the transition to the advantageous section is performed, and when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated.
In the normal section, when the first win and the second win, it is possible to decide to shift to the advantageous section.
When the player wins the second prize in the normal section and decides to move to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display means is used by a predetermined timing (until the next game can be bet and the settlement switch 46 can be operated). Is displayed by
When the first prize is won in the normal section and it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, it is possible not to display by the advantageous section display means (for example, when displaying 1 BBA) by the predetermined timing. It is characterized by that.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 11 According to the initial invention, when the combination of predetermined symbols corresponding to the first winning is not stopped in the first winning game and the first winning is carried over to the next game. , The next game can be executed without displaying by the advantageous section display means.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display by the advantageous section display means from being performed before the player knows that the first prize has been won. In other words, it is possible to prevent the display by the advantageous section display means from being executed only when the winning combination is not won in the first winning game.

12. Initial invention 12
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 12 Same as the original invention 11.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 12 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when the small role B group is won) and
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating the instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78) and
Of the game sections, the normal section in which the instruction function operating game is not executed and the normal section
Of the game sections, the advantageous section in which the instruction function operating game can be executed, and
Advantageous section display means (advantageous section display LED77) for displaying that it is an advantageous section, and
Means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13) for determining one of a plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), and
It is provided with a lottery means for executing a lottery so as to have a case of first winning (1BBA + duplicate winning of small winning combination E1) or second winning (single winning of small winning combination E1).
The winning probability of the first winning is the same for all set values,
The winning probability of the second winning is the same for all set values,
The first winning is a winning including a special role (1BBA) in which the winning is carried over to the next game until the combination of the symbols is stopped, and a predetermined role (small role E1) in which the winning is not carried over to the next game.
The second winning is a winning that includes a predetermined role and does not include a special role.
When the transition condition to the advantageous section is satisfied, the transition to the advantageous section is performed, and when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated.
In the normal section, when the first win and the second win, it is possible to decide to shift to the advantageous section.
When the player wins the first prize in the normal section and decides to move to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display means is used until a predetermined timing (until the next game can be bet and the settlement switch 46 can be operated). There are cases where the display is performed and cases where the display is not performed by the advantageous section display means by the predetermined timing.
When the player wins the second prize in the normal section and decides to shift to the advantageous section, the display is performed by the advantageous section display means by the predetermined timing.
The second solution is in the first solution.
The first winning game is characterized in that giving priority to stopping the combination of symbols of a predetermined combination rather than stopping the combination of symbols of special roles.
(C) Effect of Initial Invention 12 According to the initial invention, when the player wins the first prize and decides to shift to the advantageous section, the display by the advantageous section display means may or may not be performed by a predetermined timing. Therefore, even if the combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined combination is stopped and the display is performed by the advantageous section display means, it is possible to make the player expect that the special combination will continue to be won after that. Become.

13. Initial invention 13
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 13 Conventionally, an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (for example, the correct answer pressing order when a pressing order bell is won) is executed. That (AT) is known.
Here, it is known that AT control (management) is executed not only on the sub control board but also on the main control board (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-161344).
In addition, when the AT is won, for example, the number of precursory games is drawn, and after the number of precursory games is exhausted, the AT winning notification is given.
On the other hand, recently, for example, when it is decided to shift to an advantageous section with the winning of a role that does not carry over the winning to the next game, it is considered to display the transition to the advantageous section before the start of the next game. ing.
However, if the display is performed at an early stage in this way, there is a problem that it is difficult to perform a fanning effect of whether or not to shift to an advantageous section.
Therefore, the problem to be solved by the initial invention is to make it possible to output a fanning effect or the like regarding the advantageous section after that even when the transition to the advantageous section is displayed at an early stage.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 13 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when the small role B group is won) and
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating the instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78) and
Of the game sections, the normal section in which the instruction function operating game is not executed and the normal section
Of the game sections, the advantageous section in which the instruction function operating game can be executed, and
Advantageous section display means (advantageous section display LED77) for displaying that it is an advantageous section, and
Means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13) for determining one of a plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), and
It is provided with a lottery means for executing a lottery so as to have a specific winning (for example, a single winning of a small winning combination E1).
The winning probability of a specific win is the same for all set values,
When the transition condition to the advantageous section is satisfied, the transition to the advantageous section is performed, and when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated.
When a specific win is made in the normal section, it is possible to decide to move to the advantageous section.
When a specific win is made in the normal section and it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, the display by the advantageous section display means is displayed by the predetermined timing (until the next game can be bet and the settlement switch 46 can be operated). And
In the advantageous section, the instruction function operating game (a game that displays the correct answer pressing order when the small winning combination B group is won) is executed at least once.
The advantageous section includes a first end condition (for example, the number of times the instruction function activated game is executed is one) and a second end condition (for example, a game from the start of the advantageous section) in which the expected value of the number of times the instruction function activated game is executed is different. The number of times is 100 games).

The second solution is in the first solution.
As the end condition of the advantageous section, there is a third end condition (the number of games from the start of the advantageous section is 1500 games) which is prioritized over the first end condition and the second end condition.
When the third end condition is satisfied, the advantageous section is ended even before the first end condition or the second end condition is satisfied.
The third solution is in the first or second solution.
When the display is performed by the advantageous section display means, it is possible to output a continuous effect over a plurality of games.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 13 According to the initial invention, when it is decided to shift to an advantageous section, even if the display is performed by the advantageous section display means at an early stage, at least a plurality of advantageous section ending conditions are provided. In addition, since it may end in one instruction function operation game, even after the display by the advantageous section display means, a production that incites the player, etc. (for example, the player continues to have a sense of expectation). It is possible to output the effect).

14. Initial invention 14
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 14 Conventionally, an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the correct answer pressing order when the pressing order bell is won) is executed. That (AT) is known.
Here, it is known that AT control (management) is executed not only on the sub control board but also on the main control board (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-161344).
However, in the conventional technology, it is common to draw an AT lottery even in a game that is inside after winning a special role, but a game that tries to maintain the inside until the AT is won. Since the number of players has increased, it is desirable not to draw AT lottery for games that have recently become internal.
In addition, the middle-tier cherry (rare small role) is known as a stop roll with high expectation of winning AT.
Here, there is a problem that if the middle cherry appears after being inside the special role (after the player knows that the special role has been won), the player is given the impression of wasting money. ..
Therefore, the problem that the invention initially tries to solve is not to stop the combination of symbols that can be expected to shift to the advantageous section when the transition to the advantageous section is not decided after the special role is inside. ..

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 14 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when the small role B group is won) and
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating the instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78) and
Of the game sections, the normal section in which the instruction function operating game is not executed and the normal section
Of the game sections, the advantageous section in which the instruction function operating game can be executed, and
Advantageous section display means (advantageous section display LED77) for displaying that it is an advantageous section, and
Means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13) for determining one of a plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), and
A lottery means (role lottery means 61) that executes a lottery so as to have a specific winning (single winning of small winning combination E1) or a special winning (winning of 1BB), and
A reel control means (65) for stopping and controlling a reel when the stop switch is operated based on the result of a lottery executed by the lottery means is provided.
The winning probability of a specific win is the same for all set values,
The special winning includes the winning of a special role that carries the winning to the next game until the combination of the symbols is stopped.
When the transition condition to the advantageous section is satisfied, the transition to the advantageous section is performed, and when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated.
In the normal section, when a specific win is made, it is possible to decide to shift to the advantageous section.
In the normal section, even when the specific winning is achieved, if the winning of the special role is carried over, it is not decided to shift to the advantageous section,
The reel control means
In a game during a normal section in which the winning of a special role is not carried over, when a specific winning is achieved, the symbol combination A (the combination of symbols in which the middle cherry is displayed) is controlled so that it can be stopped.
In a game during a normal section in which the winning of a special role is carried over, when a specific winning is achieved, priority is given to stopping the symbol combination B (the combination of symbols in which the middle cherry is not displayed) rather than the symbol combination A. It is characterized by controlling so as to.
The second solution is in the first solution.
The profit when the symbol combination A is stopped and the profit when the symbol combination B is stopped are the same (both have two payouts).

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 14 According to the original invention, in the non-internal area where a special role has not been won, when a specific winning is achieved, the winning flag is only the specific winning, but the special role is won. When a specific win is made in the inside, the winning flag is a special role + a specific win. Then, if the winning flags are different, the reel stop control can be changed. Utilizing this, in the non-internal specific winning, the symbol combination A that can be expected to shift to the advantageous section is stopped, and in the internal specific winning, the stop of the symbol combination B is prioritized (for example, the symbol combination B is stopped). Combination A is not stopped).
As a result, when the special role is inside, the player is given the impression of wasting money by eliminating or reducing the stoppage of the symbol combination A that can be expected to shift to the advantageous section. It can be eliminated or reduced.

15. Initial invention 15
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 15 Conventionally, an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (for example, the correct answer pressing order when a pressing order bell is won) is executed. That (AT) is known.
Here, it is known that AT control (management) is executed not only on the sub control board but also on the main control board (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-161344).
However, in the conventional technology, even when a role to be granted a privilege (for example, addition of the number of AT games) is won during AT, the privilege cannot be granted, for example, the upper limit of the privilege grant has been reached. There was a case. However, there is a problem that the player may feel distrust if the privilege is not given even if a stop roll to which the privilege is given appears.
Therefore, the problem that the invention initially tries to solve is the design corresponding to the winning that is the target of the award, if there are special circumstances in which the award cannot be given in the case of winning the award. It is to prevent the combination of.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 15 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when the small role B group is won) and
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating the instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78) and
Of the game sections, the normal section in which the instruction function operating game is not executed and the normal section
Of the game sections, the advantageous section in which the instruction function operating game can be executed, and
Advantageous section display means (advantageous section display LED77) for displaying that it is an advantageous section, and
A lottery means (role lottery means 61) that executes a lottery so as to have a specific winning (single winning of a small winning combination E1), and
A reel control means (65) for stopping and controlling a reel when the stop switch is operated based on the result of a lottery executed by the lottery means is provided.
When a specific win is made, it is possible to stop symbol combination A (combination of symbols in which the middle cherry is displayed) or symbol combination B (combination of symbols in which the middle cherry is not displayed).
When the transition condition to the advantageous section is satisfied, the transition to the advantageous section is performed, and when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated.
It is possible to decide to grant benefits when a specific win is made in an advantageous section.
The reel control means can stop the symbol combination B and stop the symbol combination A when the stop switch is operated in the specific operation mode (right first stop) in the game in which the specific winning is achieved. Control so as not to let
When a specific win is made in an advantageous section and it is decided to grant a privilege, the specific operation mode is not notified and the specific operation mode is not notified.
When a specific winner is won in an advantageous section and it is decided not to give a privilege, the specific operation mode is notified.
The second solution is in the first solution.
The profit when the symbol combination A is stopped and the profit when the symbol combination B is stopped are the same (both have two payouts).

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 15 According to the initial invention, there are cases where the privilege is given and cases where the privilege is not given based on the specific winning during the advantageous section, and when the privilege is given, the privilege is given. When the corresponding symbol combination A is stopped but the privilege is not given (for example, when it is close to the upper limit of the number of games in the advantageous section), the symbol combination A appears by notifying (instructing) the specific operation mode. I won't let you. As a result, it is possible to control the symbol combination A from appearing in a situation where the privilege cannot be given. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust that the privilege is not given even though the combination A of the symbols has appeared.

16. Initial invention 16
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 16 In the initial invention, a slot having a winning combination in which the same winning combination is won regardless of the operation mode of the stop switch and a winning combination in which the winning combination is different depending on the operation mode of the stop switch. It's about the machine.
Conventionally, it has been known to execute an instruction function operating game (AT) for activating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (for example, the correct answer pressing order when a pressing order bell is won) (for example). JP-A-2014-161344).
In addition, it is known that a winning combination (for example, a push order bell) in which the winning combination is different depending on the operation mode of the stop switch and a winning combination (for example, a common bell) in which the same winning combination is won regardless of the operation mode of the stop switch are provided. Has been done.
If the winning probabilities of the push order bell and the common bell are different according to the set value, the payout rate will be commensurate with the set value. However, if a difference is provided in the winning probability according to the set value, there is a problem that the set value can be easily guessed by counting the number of winnings.
Therefore, the problem to be solved by the initial invention is regardless of the winning combination (for example, the push order bell) having a case where the winning combination is won or not depending on the operation mode of the stop switch, and the operation mode of the stop switch. When a winning combination (for example, a common bell) is provided to win a winning combination, the setting value cannot be estimated while providing a difference in the winning probability commensurate with the set value.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 16 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution is
Means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13) for determining one of a plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), and
When,
A lottery means (role lottery means 61) for executing a lottery so as to have a case of first winning (winning of small winning combination A) or second winning (winning of small winning combination B group), and
A reel control means (65) for stopping and controlling a reel when a stop switch is operated based on the result of a lottery executed by the lottery means is provided.
The winning probabilities of the first win differ in at least two set values,
The winning probabilities of the second win differ in at least two set values,
In the first winning game, the reel control means stops a predetermined combination of symbols ("black 7 / watermelon"-"bell C"-"replay") regardless of the operation mode of the stop switch. ,
In the second winning game, the reel control means stops and controls the reel so as to have a case where the combination of the predetermined symbols is stopped and a case where the combination of the predetermined symbols is not stopped according to the operation mode of the stop switch. ,
It has a set value x (setting 1) and a set value y (setting 6) as set values.
"Probability of winning the first win of the set value y (number of places" 1250 ")"-"Probability of winning the first win of the set value x (number of places" 1000 ")" = p1 (number of places difference "250"),
"Probability of winning the second win of the set value y (number of places" 770 "x 12)"-"Probability of winning the second win of the set value x (number of places" 750 "x 12)" = p2 (number difference " 240 ")
When
p1> p2
It is characterized by being.
The second solution is in the first solution.
The number of payouts of the game medium (9 sheets) when the combination of the predetermined symbols is stopped is the maximum number of payouts with respect to the number of input of the game medium (3 pieces) in the game.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 16 According to the initial invention, the same symbol combination (predetermined symbol combination) is stopped at the time of the first winning and the pressing order correct answer at the time of the second winning. It is not possible to determine whether the player has won the first prize or the second prize simply by stopping the combination of symbols.
On the other hand, since the winning probability of the first winning regardless of the skill of the player has a larger setting difference than that of the second winning, the payout rate can be set according to the set value.

17. Initial invention 17
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 17 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having a winning combination in which the winning combination differs depending on the operation mode of the stop switch.
Conventionally, it has been known to execute an instruction function operating game (AT) for activating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (for example, the correct answer pressing order when a pressing order bell is won) (for example). JP-A-2014-161344).
Here, an advantageous section is provided this time, and the instruction function operating game is executed at least once during the advantageous section, and the instruction function operating game is set to the maximum number of payouts in the specified number of the game state. Etc. are being considered.
Therefore, the problem to be solved by the initial invention is to enable the instruction function operation game to be executed at an early stage when the above-mentioned one instruction function operation game is executed.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 17 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
Means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13) for determining one of a plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), and
A lottery means (role) that executes a lottery so as to have a case of first winning (winning of small winning combination A), second winning (winning of small winning combination B group), or third winning (winning of small winning combination C group). Lottery means 61) and
A reel control means (65) for stopping and controlling a reel when a stop switch is operated based on the result of a lottery executed by the lottery means is provided.
The winning probabilities of the first win differ in at least two set values,
The reel control means
In the game that won the first prize, a predetermined combination of symbols ("Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell C"-"Replay") is stopped regardless of the operation mode of the stop switch.
In the second winning game, the reel is stopped and controlled so as to have a case where the combination of the predetermined symbols is stopped and a case where the combination of the predetermined symbols is not stopped according to the operation mode of the stop switch.
In the game that won the third prize, the combination of specific symbols ("Bell A / Bell B"-"Blue 7 / Cherry"-"Watermelon") is stopped or stopped according to the operation mode of the stop switch. The reel is stopped and controlled so as to have a case where it is not caused.
The number of game media paid out (9 sheets) when the combination of the predetermined symbols is stopped is the maximum number of payouts with respect to the specified number of game media in the game.
The winning probability of the second winning (for example, setting 1 and the number "750" x 12) is set higher than the winning probability of the third winning (for example, setting 1 and the number "200" x 3). It is characterized by.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 17 According to the initial invention, the probability of winning the second prize is higher than the probability of winning the third prize. Therefore, as soon as possible, "the maximum number of payouts in the specified number of the gaming state is obtained. At least one possible instruction function operating game "can be executed.

18. Initial invention 18
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 18 Conventionally, an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (for example, the correct answer pressing order when a pressing order bell is won) is executed. That (AT) is known.
Here, it is known that AT control (management) is executed not only on the sub control board but also on the main control board (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-161344).
However, when a combination that triggers the transition to the advantageous section and a combination that does not trigger the transition are provided and both of them can stop the combination of the same symbols, what kind of reel stop control is executed becomes a problem. ..
Therefore, the problem to be solved by the initial invention is to appropriately control the reel stop at the time of winning of these combinations when the combination that triggers the transition to the advantageous section and the combination that does not trigger the transition are provided. Is.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 18 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when the small role B group is won) and
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating the instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78) and
Of the game sections, the normal section in which the instruction function operating game is not executed and the normal section
Of the game sections, the advantageous section in which the instruction function operating game can be executed, and
Means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13) for determining one of a plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), and
A lottery means (role lottery means 61) that executes a lottery so as to have a case of first winning (winning of small winning combination E1) or second winning (winning of small winning combination E2), and
A reel control means (65) for stopping and controlling a reel when the stop switch is operated based on the result of a lottery executed by the lottery means is provided.
The winning probability of the first winning is the same for all set values,
The winning probabilities of the second win differ in at least two set values,
When the transition condition to the advantageous section is satisfied, the transition to the advantageous section is performed, and when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated.
When the first prize is won in the normal section, it is possible to decide to move to the advantageous section.
When the second prize is won in the normal section, it is not decided to shift to the advantageous section,
The reel control means executes the same stop control for both the first winning game and the second winning game (at the time of the left or middle first stop, the middle cherry can be stopped, and the right second At the time of one stop, the middle cherry is not stopped)
It is characterized by that.

The second solution is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when the small role B group is won) and
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating the instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78) and
Of the game sections, the normal section in which the instruction function operating game is not executed and the normal section
Of the game sections, the advantageous section in which the instruction function operating game can be executed, and
Means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13) for determining one of a plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), and
A lottery means (role lottery means 61) that executes a lottery so as to have a case of first winning (winning of small winning combination E1) or second winning (winning of small winning combination E2), and
A reel control means (65) for stopping and controlling a reel when the stop switch is operated based on the result of a lottery executed by the lottery means is provided.
The winning probability of the first winning is the same for all set values,
The winning probabilities of the second win differ in at least two set values,
When the transition condition to the advantageous section is satisfied, the transition to the advantageous section is performed, and when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated.
When the first prize is won in the normal section, it is possible to decide to move to the advantageous section.
When the second prize is won in the normal section, it is not decided to shift to the advantageous section,
The reel control means
In the first winning game, the reels are stopped and controlled so as to have a case where a predetermined combination of symbols (middle-stage cherry) is stopped and a case where the combination of the predetermined symbols is not stopped, depending on the operation mode of the stop switch.
In the second winning game, the reel is stopped and controlled so as to have a case where the combination of the predetermined symbols is stopped and a case where the combination of the predetermined symbols is not stopped according to the operation mode of the stop switch.
In the first winning game and the second winning game, when the stop switch is operated in an operation mode (left or middle first stop) for stopping the combination of the predetermined symbols, the same stop is performed. By control, the combination of the predetermined symbols is stopped (priority is given to the winning of the small winning combination 36 that stops the middle cherry, and when the small winning combination 36 cannot be won, the small winning combination 38 is won), and the predetermined symbol When the stop switch is not operated in the operation mode of stopping the combination (first right stop), different stop controls are executed (for example, the small winning combination 38 is won at the time of the first winning, and the small winning combination 38 is won at the time of the second winning. , Make a small role 41 win)
It is characterized by that.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 18 According to the first solution, the same stop control is executed at both the first winning and the second winning, so that it is possible to determine the transition to the advantageous section. The player does not know whether it is one win or the second win that does not decide to move to the advantageous section. Therefore, although there is no setting difference in the probability of deciding to shift to the advantageous section, it is possible to give the player the impression that there is a setting difference.
Further, according to the second solution, when the stop switch is operated in the manner of stopping the combination of predetermined symbols at the time of the first winning or the second winning, it is possible to decide to shift to the advantageous section. It is possible to prevent the player from knowing whether it is the first winning or the second winning that does not decide to shift to the advantageous section. On the other hand, when the stop switch is not operated in the operation mode of stopping the combination of predetermined symbols, it is the first winning that can decide to shift to the advantageous section by the stop result or the like, or the advantageous section. It is possible for the player to determine whether or not the player has won the second prize without deciding to shift to.

19. Initial invention 19
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 19 Conventionally, an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (for example, the correct answer pressing order when a pressing order bell is won) is executed. That (AT) is known.
Here, it is known that AT control (management) is executed not only on the sub control board but also on the main control board (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-161344).
By the way, when shifting to a special game during an advantageous section, it is desired to set a higher setting value so that more benefits are given during the advantageous section. However, when the privilege is given in association with the winning of the conditional device, there is a request that the privilege should be given on the condition that the conditional device having no setting difference is won.
Therefore, the problem that the invention initially tries to solve is that when the game shifts to the special game during the advantageous section, the privilege is given on condition that the condition device having no setting difference is won, and the higher the setting value, the more the privilege. Is to increase the probability of being granted.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 19 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when the small role B group is won) and
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating the instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78) and
Of the game sections, the normal section in which the instruction function operating game is not executed and the normal section
Of the game sections, the advantageous section in which the instruction function operating game can be executed, and
Means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13) for determining one of a plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), and
It is provided with a lottery means for executing a lottery so as to have a case of a special winning including a special role (winning including 1BBA).
The winning probability of special winning is the same for all set values,
When the transition condition to the advantageous section is satisfied, the transition to the advantageous section is performed, and when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated.
When a special win is made and the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role is stopped, the game shifts to the special game (1BBA is in operation).
The end condition of the special game is set that the number of payouts of the game medium exceeds a predetermined number (150 sheets).
The lottery means executes a lottery so as to have a case of a specific winning (winning of replay D) in a special game.
The winning probability of a specific win in a special game is the same for all set values,
When a specific win is made in a special game during an advantageous section, it is possible to decide to grant a privilege (add an advantageous section).
It has a set value x (setting 1) and a set value y (setting 6) as set values.
The expected value of the number of games played during the special game when the set value y is y is larger than the expected value of the number of games played during the special game when the set value x is set.

The second solution is in the first solution.
The lottery means executes a lottery so as to have a case of being a first winner or a second winner in a special game.
The winning probabilities of the first winning (winning of small winning combination A) differ in at least two set values.
The winning probabilities of the second win (winning of the small role E2) differ in at least two set values.
The number of game media payouts when the combination of symbols corresponding to the first winning is stopped is larger than the number of payouts of the game media when the combination of symbols corresponding to the second winning is stopped.
The winning probability of the first winning in the special game is set higher when the set value x is set than when the set value y is set.
The winning probability of the second winning in the special game is set lower when the set value x is set than when the set value y is set.
The third solution is in the first or second solution.
The specific winning is the winning related to the predetermined re-game combination,
The special game is characterized in that even if the combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined re-game combination is stopped, it is not counted in the number of payouts of the game medium during the special game.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 19 According to the initial invention, when shifting to a special game, the set value y has a larger expected value of the number of games staying in the special game than the set value x. Therefore, the special game at the set value y has a higher probability of being a specific winning than the special game at the set value x. Therefore, the set value y can have a higher probability of being granted the privilege in the special game during the advantageous section than the set value x.

20. Initial invention 20
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 20 Conventionally, an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (for example, the correct answer pressing order when a pressing order bell is won) is executed. (AT) is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-161344).
Here, when a privilege is given when shifting to a special game during an advantageous section, the privilege can be given in a special game based on winning a special role having no setting difference, and a special role having a setting difference can be given. There is a request not to give benefits in special games based on winning.
However, if such a setting is made, there is a problem that in a special game based on winning a special role having a setting difference, it is not possible to give the player a sense of expectation of granting a privilege.
Therefore, the problem that the invention initially tries to solve is to make it possible to expect the granting of benefits even if the game shifts to a special game based on winning a special role having a setting difference.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 20 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when the small role B group is won) and
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating the instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78) and
Of the game sections, the normal section in which the instruction function operating game is not executed and the normal section
Of the game sections, the advantageous section in which the instruction function operating game can be executed, and
Means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13) for determining one of a plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), and
It is provided with a lottery means for executing a lottery so as to have a case of a first special winning including a first special role (1BBA) or a second special winning including a second special role (1BBB).
The winning probability of the first special winning is the same for all set values,
The winning probabilities of the second special win differ in at least two set values,
When the transition condition to the advantageous section is satisfied, the transition to the advantageous section is performed, and when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated.
When the first special win is made and the combination of symbols corresponding to the first special role is stopped, the game shifts to the first special game.
When the second special win is made and the combination of symbols corresponding to the second special role is stopped, the game shifts to the second special game.
During the first special game during the advantageous section, it is possible to decide to grant benefits,
During the second special game in the advantageous section, it is not decided to grant the privilege,
After the second special game in the advantageous section is completed, it is possible to decide to grant the privilege under a predetermined condition.

The second solution is in the first solution.
When the first special game is completed, it shifts to the first game state (non-RT) and
When the second special game is completed, the state shifts to the second game state (RT1) different from the first game state, and the game shifts to the second game state (RT1).
In the second gaming state, the winning probability of the specific winning (winning of Replay E) is set higher than in the first gaming state.
The winning probability of a specific win is the same for all set values,
It is characterized in that it is possible to decide to grant a privilege when a specific winning is made in an advantageous section.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 20 According to the initial invention, a first special game in which it is possible to determine to grant a privilege in an advantageous section and a second special game in which it is not determined to grant a privilege in an advantageous section. Since it is possible to give a privilege based on the digestion of the second special game when the second special game is provided, it gives a feeling of expectation that the privilege will be given even when the second special game is started. be able to.
In addition, with respect to a specific grant, the first special game and the second special game can be balanced, and the timing of granting the privilege can be unique.

21. Initial invention 21
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 21 Conventionally, an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (for example, the correct answer pressing order when a pressing order bell is won) is executed. (AT) is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-161344).
Here, when an advantageous section is provided and a special combination is won during the advantageous section and the game shifts to a special game, the question is whether to continue counting the advantageous section (for example, subtracting the number of games). ..
Therefore, the problem to be solved by the initial invention is to adjust the count of the advantageous section when shifting to the special game during the advantageous section.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 21 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when the small role B group is won) and
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating the instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78) and
Of the game sections, the normal section in which the instruction function operating game is not executed and the normal section
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operating game can be executed is provided.
When the transition condition to the advantageous section is satisfied, the transition to the advantageous section is performed, and when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated.
A first counter (advantageous section counter 69a) that counts the first variable for determining whether or not the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, and
A second counter (upper limit counter 69b) that counts a second variable for determining whether or not the upper limit end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, and
It is provided with a lottery means for executing a lottery so as to have a case of a first special winning including a first special role (1BBA) or a second special winning including a second special role (1BBB).
When it is determined that the end condition is satisfied based on the count value of the first counter, the advantageous section is ended and the advantageous section is ended.
When it is determined that the upper limit end condition is satisfied based on the count value of the second counter, the advantageous section is ended even before the end condition is satisfied.
When the first special win is made and the combination of symbols corresponding to the first special role is stopped, the game shifts to the first special game.
When the second special win is made and the combination of symbols corresponding to the second special role is stopped, the game shifts to the second special game.
During the first special game in the advantageous section, it is possible to decide to add the advantageous section.
When adding an advantageous section, extend the end condition and extend it.
During the second special game in the advantageous section, it is not decided to add the advantageous section,
During the first special game, the first counter and the second counter can be updated.
During the second special game, the second counter can be updated, and the first counter is not updated.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 21 According to the initial invention, in the first special game in which it is possible to determine to add an advantageous section, the first counter is updated, but in the second special game in which it is not decided to add an advantageous section. Since the first counter is not updated, the count of the advantageous section can be balanced between the first special game and the second special game.

1 Base part 10 Slot machine 11 Power switch 12 Setting key switch 13 Setting switch 14 Reset switch 15 Door switch 16 Board case 16a Caulking part 17 Display window 21 Direction lamp 22 Speaker 23 Image display device 24 Cross key 25 Menu button 31 Reel 32 Motor 33 Reel sensor 35 Hopper 36 Hopper motor 37 Payout sensor 40a 1-bet switch 40b 3-bet switch 41 Start switch 42 Stop switch 43 Medal insertion slot 43a Passage sensor 44 Input sensor 45 Blocker 46 Settlement switch 50 (50A, 50B) Main control board (50A, 50B) Main control means)
51 Input port 52 Output port 53 RWM
54 ROM
55 Main CPU
61 Winning flag control means 62 Winning flag control means 63 Push order instruction number selection means 64 Production group number selection means 65 Reel control means 66 Winning judgment means 67 Payout means 68 RT control means 69 Advantageous section control means 69a Advantageous section counter 69b Upper limit counter 70 External signal transmission means 71 Control command transmission means 72 Management information control means 73 Set value display LED
74 Management information display LED
75 Display board 76 Storage number display LED
77 Advantageous section display LED
78 Acquisition number display LED
80 Sub control board (sub control means)
81 Input port 82 Output port 83 RWM
84 ROM
85 sub CPU
91 Production output control means 100 External centralized terminal board 200 Hall computer

Claims (1)

With a predetermined control means
Equipped with a predetermined display means capable of displaying game history information,
The predetermined control means can aggregate a plurality of information related to the game.
The predetermined control means can calculate numerical information related to the game history by using the aggregated information.
The game history information is composed of information on the type of game history and numerical information on the game history.
As the game history information, there are a case where the character ratio information is displayed and a case where the continuous character ratio information is displayed.
Figures for a game history corresponding to the character object ratio information information is character object ratio (ratio of the number of payouts of game media during character object operation to the total payout of game media),
The numerical information regarding the game history corresponding to the continuous bonus ratio information is the continuous bonus ratio (the ratio of the number of game media paid out when the first-class special bonus is activated to the total number of game media paid out).
Information on the type of game history can be displayed by the first display unit and the second display unit of the predetermined display means.
Numerical information related to the game history can be displayed by the third display unit and the fourth display unit of the predetermined display means.
When the game history information is displayed on the predetermined display means, the DP segment of the second display unit is configured to be lit.
When displaying the character ratio information, if the cumulative number of games played is less than a predetermined value, the information related to the type of game history corresponding to the character ratio information can be displayed in a blinking manner.
When displaying the continuous bonus ratio information, if the cumulative number of games is less than the predetermined value, the information related to the type of game history corresponding to the continuous bonus ratio information can be displayed in a blinking manner .
A slot machine characterized in that when the total number of payouts of game media reaches a predetermined upper limit, the update of the total number of payouts of game media is completed .

Images